Mitsubishi GOT2000 GT23 Electric Connection Manual PDF

GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) For GT Works3 Version1

-GT27 model -GT25 model -GT25 open frame model -GT25 wide model -GT25 rugged model -GT23 model -GT21 model -GT21 wide model

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Always read these precautions before using this equipment.) Before using this product, please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly. The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product. In this manual, the safety precautions are ranked as "WARNING" and "CAUTION".

Note that failure to observe CAUTION may lead to a serious accident depending on the circumstances. Make sure to observe both warnings and cautions to ensure personal safety. Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user.

[DESIGN PRECAUTIONS]

WARNING Some failures of the GOT, communication unit or cable may keep the outputs on or off.

Some failures of a touch panel may cause malfunction of the input objects such as a touch switch. An external monitoring circuit should be provided to check for output signals which may lead to a serious accident. Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction.

Do not use the GOT as the warning device that may cause a serious accident. An independent and redundant hardware or mechanical interlock is required to configure the device that displays and outputs serious warning. Failure to observe this instruction may result in an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction.

When the GOT backlight has a failure, the GOT status will be as follows. Failure to observe this instruction may result in an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction. [GT27, GT25, GT23] The POWER LED blinks (orange/blue), the display section dims, and inputs by a touch switch are disabled. [GT2105-Q] The POWER LED blinks (orange/blue), and the display section dims. However, inputs by a touch switch are still available. [GT2107-W, GT2104-R, GT2104-P, GT2103-P, GS21] The display section dims. However, inputs by a touch switch are still available. Even if the display section dims, inputs by a touch switch may still be available. This may cause an unintended operation of the touch switch. For example, if an operator assumes that the display section has dimmed because of the screen save function and touches the display section to cancel the screen save, a touch switch may be activated. The GOT backlight failure can be checked with a system signal of the GOT. (This system signal is not available on GT2107-W, GT2104-R, GT2104-P, GT2103-P, and GS21.)

WARNING

CAUTION

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in death or severe injury.

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage.

1

2

[DESIGN PRECAUTIONS]

WARNING The display section of the GOT is an analog-resistive type touch panel.

When multiple points of the display section are touched simultaneously, an accident may occur due to incorrect output or malfunction. [GT27] Do not touch three points or more simultaneously on the display section. Doing so may cause an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction. [GT25, GT23, GT21, GS21] Do not touch two points or more simultaneously on the display section. Doing so may cause a touch switch near the touched points to operate unexpectedly, or may cause an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction.

When programs or parameters of the controller (such as a PLC) that is monitored by the GOT are changed, be sure to reset the GOT, or turn on the unit again after shutting off the power as soon as possible. Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction.

If a communication fault (including cable disconnection) occurs during monitoring on the GOT, communication between the GOT and PLC CPU is suspended and the GOT becomes inoperative. (1) For bus connection (GT27 and GT25 only): The GOT becomes inoperative. Power on the PLC CPU again to reestablish communication. (2) For other than bus connection: The GOT becomes inoperative. A system where the GOT is used should be configured to perform any significant operation to the system by using the switches of a device other than the GOT on the assumption that a GOT communication fault will occur. Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction.

To maintain the security (confidentiality, integrity, and availability) of the GOT and the system against unauthorized access, DoS*1 attacks, computer viruses, and other cyberattacks from unreliable networks and devices via network, take appropriate measures such as firewalls, virtual private networks (VPNs), and antivirus solutions. Mitsubishi Electric shall have no responsibility or liability for any problems involving GOT trouble and system trouble by unauthorized access, DoS attacks, computer viruses, and other cyberattacks. *1 DoS: A denial-of-service (DoS) attack disrupts services by overloading systems or exploiting vulnerabilities, resulting in a denial-of-service (DoS) state.

[DESIGN PRECAUTIONS]

[MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS]

CAUTION Do not bundle the control and communication cables with main-circuit, power or other wiring.

Run the above cables separately from such wiring and keep them a minimum of 100mm apart. Not doing so noise can cause a malfunction.

Do not press the GOT display section with a pointed material as a pen or driver. Doing so can result in a damage or failure of the display section.

When the GOT connects to an Ethernet network, the IP address setting is restricted according to the system configuration. [GT27, GT25, GT23] When a GOT2000 series model and a GOT1000 series model are on an Ethernet network, do not set the IP address 192.168.0.18 for the GOTs and the controllers on this network. Doing so can cause IP address duplication at the GOT startup, adversely affecting the communication of the device with the IP address 192.168.0.18. The operation at the IP address duplication depends on the devices and the system. [GT21, GS21] Setting the IP address (192.168.3.18) in the following system configurations can cause IP address duplication at GOT startup, adversely affecting communications of the device whose IP address is 192.168.3.18. The operation at IP address duplication depends on the devices and the system. When multiple GOTs connect to the Ethernet network: Do not set the IP address (192.168.3.18) for the GOTs and the controllers in the network. When one GOT connects to the Ethernet network: Do not set the IP address (192.168.3.18) for the controllers other than the GOT in the network.

When using the Ethernet interfaces, set an IP address for each interface to access a different network.

Turn on the controllers and the network devices to be ready for communication before they communicate with the GOT. Failure to do so can cause a communication error on the GOT.

When the GOT is subject to shock or vibration, or some colors appear on the screen of the GOT, the screen of the GOT might flicker.

WARNING Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or

removing the GOT main unit to/from the panel. Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction.

Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the option unit onto/from the GOT. (GT27, GT25 Only)

3

4

[MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS]

CAUTION Use the GOT in the environment that satisfies the general specifications described in this manual.

Not doing so can cause an electric shock, fire, malfunction or product damage or deterioration. When mounting the GOT to the control panel, tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque

range with a Phillips-head screwdriver No. 2. [GT27, GT25-W, GT2512-S, GT2510-V, GT2508-V, GT23, GT2107-W] Specified torque range (0.36 Nm to 0.48 Nm) [GT2505-V, GT2105-Q] Specified torque range (0.30 Nm to 0.50 Nm) [GT2104-R, GT2104-P, GT2103-P] Specified torque range (0.20 Nm to 0.25 Nm) Undertightening can cause the GOT to drop, short circuit or malfunction. Overtightening can cause a drop, short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT.

When mounting a unit on the GOT, tighten the mounting screws in the following specified torque range. [GT27, GT25 (except GT25-W)] When loading the communication unit or option unit other than wireless LAN unit to the GOT, fit it to the connection interface of the GOT and tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range (0.36 Nm to 0.48 Nm) with a Phillips-head screwdriver No. 2. When loading the wireless LAN unit to the GOT, fit it to the side interface of GOT and tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range (0.10 Nm to 0.14 Nm) with a Phillips-head screwdriver No. 1. When the GOT is installed vertically, its side interface is positioned on the bottom. To prevent the falling of the wireless LAN communication unit from the side interface, install or remove the unit while holding it with hands. [GT25-W] When mounting the wireless LAN communication unit on the GOT, fit it to the wireless LAN communication unit interface and tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range (0.10 Nm to 0.14 Nm) with a Phillips-head screwdriver No.1. [GT2103-P] When mounting the SD card unit on the GOT, fit it to the side of the GOT and tighten the tapping screws in the specified torque range (0.3 Nm to 0.6 Nm) with a Phillips-head screwdriver No. 2. Under tightening can cause the GOT to drop, short circuit or malfunction. Overtightening can cause a drop, failure or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit.

When closing the USB environmental protection cover, note the following points to ensure the IP rating. [GT27, GT25 (except GT25-W and GT2505-V)] Push the [PUSH] mark on the latch firmly to fix the cover to the GOT. [GT2512-WX, GT2510-WX, GT2507-W, GT2505-V, GT2107-W] Push the USB mark on the latch firmly to fix the cover to the GOT. [GT2105-Q] Tighten the lower fixing screws of the cover in the specified torque range (0.36 Nm to 0.48 Nm) to fix the cover to the GOT.

[MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS]

[WIRING PRECAUTIONS]

CAUTION Remove the protective film of the GOT.

When the user continues using the GOT with the protective film, the film may not be removed. In addition, for the models equipped with the human sensor function, using the GOT with the protective film may cause the human sensor not to function properly.

For GT2512F-S, GT2510F-V, and GT2508F-V, attach an environmental protection sheet dedicated to the open frame model (sold separately) to the display section. Or, attach a user-prepared environmental protection sheet. Not doing so may damage or soil the GOT or cause foreign matter to enter the GOT, resulting in a failure or malfunction.

When installing the supplied fittings on GT2512F-S, GT2510F-V, or GT2508F-V, tighten screws in the specified torque range (0.8 Nm to 1.0 Nm). Meld studs on the control panel to fasten the fittings. The studs must have strength adequate to withstand a tightening torque of 0.9 Nm or more. Make sure that no foreign matter such as welding waste is at and around the bases of the studs. Tighten nuts on the studs in the specified torque range (0.8 Nm to 0.9 Nm) with a wrench for M4 nuts. Undertightening a screw or nut may cause the GOT to drop, short-circuit, or malfunction. Overtightening a screw or nut may damage it or the GOT, causing the GOT to drop, short-circuit, or malfunction.

Do not operate or store the GOT in the environment exposed to direct sunlight, rain, high temperature, dust, humidity, or vibrations.

Although GT2507T-W is ruggedized for environments such as UV rays, temperatures and vibrations, its operation is not guaranteed in all conditions and environments. Make sure to use or store the GOT in an appropriate environment.

When using the GOT in the environment of oil or chemicals, use the protective cover for oil. Failure to do so may cause failure or malfunction due to the oil or chemical entering into the GOT.

Do not operate the GOT with its display section frozen. The water droplets on the display section may freeze at a low temperature. Touch switches and other input objects may malfunction if the display section is frozen.

WARNING Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before wiring.

Failure to do so may result in an electric shock, product damage or malfunctions.

5

6

[WIRING PRECAUTIONS]

CAUTION When grounding the FG terminal and LG terminal of the GOT power supply section, note the following

points. Not doing so may cause an electric shock or malfunction. [GT27, GT25, GT23, GT2107-W, GT2105-Q, GS21] Make sure to ground the FG terminal and LG terminal of the GOT power supply section solely for the GOT (ground resistance: 100 or less, cross-sectional area of the ground cable: 2.0 mm2 or more). (GT2705-V, GT25-W, GT2505-V, GT2107-W, GT2105-Q, and GS21 do not have the LG terminal.) [GT2104-R, GT2104-P, GT2103-P] Make sure to ground the FG terminal of the GOT power supply section with a ground resistance of 100 or less. (For GT2104-PMBLS and GT2103-PMBLS, grounding is unnecessary.)

When tightening the terminal screws, use the following screwdrivers. [GT27, GT25, GT23, GT2107-W, GT2105-Q, GS21] Use a Phillips-head screwdriver No. 2. [GT2104-R, GT2104-P, GT2103-P] For the usable screwdrivers, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Hardware)

Tighten the terminal screws of the GOT power supply section in the following specified torque range. [GT27, GT25, GT23] Specified torque range (0.5 Nm to 0.8 Nm)

For a terminal processing of a wire to the GOT power supply section, use the following terminal. [GT27, GT25, GT23, GT2107-W, GT2105-Q, GS21] Use applicable solderless terminals for terminal processing of a wire and tighten them with the specified torque. Not doing so can cause a fire, failure or malfunction. [GT2104-R, GT2104-P, GT2103-P] Connect a stranded wire or a solid wire directly, or use a rod terminal with an insulation sleeve.

Correctly wire the GOT power supply section after confirming the rated voltage and terminal arrangement of the product. Not doing so can cause a fire or failure.

Tighten the terminal screws of the GOT power supply section in the following specified torque range. [GT27, GT25, GT23, GT2107-W, GT2105-Q] Specified torque range (0.5 Nm to 0.8 Nm) [GT2104-R, GT2104-P, GT2103-P] Specified torque range (0.22 Nm to 0.25 Nm) [GS21] Specified torque range (0.5 Nm to 0.6 Nm)

Exercise care to avoid foreign matter such as chips and wire offcuts entering the GOT. Not doing so can cause a fire, failure or malfunction.

Some models have an ingress prevention label on their top to prevent foreign matter, such as wire offcuts, from entering the GOT during wiring. Do not peel this label during wiring.Before starting system operation, be sure to peel this label because of heat dissipation.

[WIRING PRECAUTIONS]

[TEST OPERATION PRECAUTIONS]

[STARTUP/MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS]

CAUTION Plug the communication cable into the GOT interface or the connector of the connected unit, and

tighten the mounting screws and the terminal screws in the specified torque range. Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction. Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit.

Plug the QnA/ACPU/Motion controller (A series) bus connection cable by inserting it into the connector of the connected unit until it "clicks". After plugging, check that it has been inserted snugly. Not doing so can cause a malfunction due to a contact fault.

WARNING Before testing the operation of a user-created screen (such as turning on or off a bit device, changing

the current value of a word device, changing the set value or current value of a timer or counter, and changing the current value of a buffer memory), thoroughly read the manual to fully understand the operating procedure. During the test operation, never change the data of the devices which are used to perform significant operation for the system. Doing so may cause an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction.

WARNING When power is on, do not touch the terminals.

Doing so can cause an electric shock or malfunction. Correctly connect the battery connector.

Do not charge, disassemble, heat, short-circuit, solder, or throw the battery into the fire. Doing so will cause the battery to produce heat, explode, or ignite, resulting in injury and fire.

Before starting cleaning or terminal screw retightening, always switch off the power externally in all phases. Not switching the power off in all phases can cause a unit failure or malfunction. Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction. Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit.

7

8

[STARTUP/MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS]

[TOUCH PANEL PRECAUTIONS]

CAUTION Do not disassemble or modify the unit.

Doing so can cause a failure, malfunction, injury or fire. Do not touch the conductive and electronic parts of the unit directly.

Doing so can cause a unit malfunction or failure. The cables connected to the unit must be run in ducts or clamped.

Not doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged due to the dangling, motion or accidental pulling of the cables or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault.

When unplugging the cable connected to the unit, do not hold and pull from the cable portion. Doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault.

Do not drop the module or subject it to strong shock. A module damage may result. Do not drop or give an impact to the battery mounted to the unit.

Doing so may damage the battery, causing the battery fluid to leak inside the battery. If the battery is dropped or given an impact, dispose of it without using.

Before touching the unit, always touch grounded metals, etc. to discharge static electricity from human body, etc. Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction.

Use the battery manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation. Use of other batteries may cause a risk of fire or explosion.

Dispose of used battery promptly. Keep away from children.Do not disassemble and do not dispose of in fire.

Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply before replacing the battery or using the dip switch of the terminating resistor. Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction by static electricity.

Before cleaning the GOT, be sure to turn off the power. Before cleaning, check the following items. Ensure that there are no problems with the installation condition of the GOT to the control panel. Ensure that there are no damages on the environmental protection sheet (not replaceable). If the environmental protection sheet peels or the cleaning solution enters between the sheet and the display section during cleaning, stop the cleaning immediately. In such a case, do not use the GOT.

CAUTION For the analog-resistive film type touch panels, normally the adjustment is not required.

However, the difference between a touched position and the object position may occur as the period of use elapses. When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs, execute the touch panel calibration.

When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs, other object may be activated. This may cause an unexpected operation due to incorrect output or malfunction.

[PRECAUTIONS FOR USING A DATA STORAGE]

[PRECAUTIONS FOR USING A DATA STORAGE]

WARNING Do not remove the SD card from drive A while the SD card is being accessed by the GOT, or the GOT

may stop processing for about 20 seconds. During this stop, you cannot operate the GOT, and the functions running in the background, including the screen refresh, alarm, logging, and script, also stop. This stop may affect the system operation, causing an accident. Before removing the SD card, check the following items. [GT27, GT25, GT23 (Except for GT2505-V and GT25HS-V)] Before removing the SD card, check that the SD card access LED is off. [GT2505-V, GT25HS-V] Make sure to turn off the SD card access switch before removing the SD card.Not doing so may damage the SD card and files. [GT21, GS21] Disable the SD card access in the GOT utility, and then check that the SD card access LED is off before removing the SD card.

Do not remove the data storage from the file server (drive N) that is being accessed by the GOT, or the system operation may be affected. Before removing the data storage, check the relevant system signal to make sure that the data storage is not being accessed.

CAUTION Do not remove the data storage from the GOT while the data storage is being accessed by the GOT,

or the data storage and files may be damaged. Before removing the data storage, check the SD card access LED, relevant system signal, or others to make sure that the data storage is not being accessed.

Turning off the GOT while it accesses the SD card results in damage to the SD card and files. When using the GOT with an SD card inserted, check the following items.

[GT27, GT25, GT23 (Except for GT2505-V and GT25HS-V)] After inserting an SD card into the GOT, make sure to close the SD card cover. Otherwise, data cannot be read or written. [GT2505-V, GT25HS-V] After inserting an SD card into the GOT, make sure to turn on the SD card access switch. Otherwise, data cannot be read or written. [GT21, GS21] After inserting an SD card into the SD card unit, make sure to enable the SD card access in the GOT utility. Otherwise, data cannot be read or written.

9

10

[PRECAUTIONS FOR USING A DATA STORAGE]

[PRECAUTIONS FOR USE]

[PRECAUTIONS FOR REMOTE CONTROL]

CAUTION When removing the SD card from the GOT, make sure to support the SD card by hand as it may pop

out. Not doing so may cause the SD card to drop from the GOT, resulting in a failure or break.

When inserting a USB device into a USB interface of the GOT, make sure to insert the device into the interface firmly. Not doing so may cause the USB device to drop from the GOT, resulting in a failure or break. (GT27, GT25, and GT2107-W)

Before removing the data storage from the GOT, follow the procedure for removal on the utility screen of the GOT. After the successful completion dialog is displayed, remove the data storage by hand carefully. Not doing so may cause the data storage to drop from the GOT, resulting in a failure or break.

CAUTION Do not touch the edges of the touch panel (display section) repeatedly.

Doing so may result in a failure. Do not turn off the GOT while data is being written to the storage memory (ROM) or SD card.

Doing so may corrupt the data, rendering the GOT inoperative. The GOT rugged model uses the environmental protection sheet (not replaceable) with UV protection

function on the front surface. Therefore, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the touch panel or the liquid crystal display panel that may be caused by ultraviolet rays. Note that if the rugged model is exposed to ultraviolet rays for an extended period of time, the front surface may turn yellow. If the rugged model is likely to be exposed to ultraviolet rays for an extended period of time, it is recommended to use a UV protective sheet (option).

WARNING Remote control is available through a network by using GOT functions, including theSoftGOT-GOT

link function, the remote personal computer operation function, the VNC server function, and the GOT Mobile function. If you remotely operate control equipment using such functions, the field operator may not notice the remote operation, leading to an accident. In addition, a communication delay or interruption may occur depending on the network environment, and remote control of control equipment cannot be performed normally in some cases. Before using the above functions to perform remote control, fully grasp the circumstances of the field site and ensure safety.

When operating the server (GOT) of the GOT Mobile function to disconnect a client, notify the operator of the client about the disconnection beforehand. Not doing so may cause an accident.

[PRECAUTIONS FOR EXCLUSIVE AUTHORIZATION CONTROL]

[DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS]

[TRANSPORTATION PRECAUTIONS]

WARNING Before using the GOT network interaction function to prevent simultaneous operations from multiple

pieces of equipment, make sure you understand the function. You can enable or disable the exclusive authorization control of the GOT network interaction function for each screen. (For all screens, the exclusive authorization control is disabled by default.) Properly determine the screens for which the exclusive authorization control is required, and set the control by screen. A screen for which the exclusive authorization control is disabled is operable simultaneously from multiple pieces of equipment. Make sure to determine the operation period for each operator, fully grasp the circumstances of the field site, and ensure safety to perform operations.

CAUTION When disposing of this product, treat it as industrial waste.

When disposing of batteries, separate them from other wastes according to the local regulations. (Refer to the GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Hardware) for details of the battery directive in the EU member states.)

CAUTION When transporting lithium batteries, make sure to treat them based on the transport regulations.

(Refer to the GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Hardware) for details of the regulated models.) Make sure to transport the GOT main unit and/or relevant unit(s) in the manner they will not be

exposed to the impact exceeding the impact resistance described in the general specifications of this manual, as they are precision devices. Failure to do so may cause the unit to fail. Check if the unit operates correctly after transportation.

When fumigants that contain halogen materials such as fluorine, chlorine, bromine, and iodine are used for disinfecting and protecting wooden packaging from insects, they cause malfunction when entering our products. Please take necessary precautions to ensure that remaining materials from fumigant do not enter our products, or treat packaging with methods other than fumigation (heat method). Additionally, disinfect and protect wood from insects before packing products.

11

12

CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Manuals for GT Works3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Abbreviations, Generic Terms, and Model Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26

PART 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING

CHAPTER 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 34 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Setting connected equipment (Channel setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 GOT Ethernet Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 I/F communication setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

1.2 Writing the Package Data onto the GOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Writing the Package Data onto the GOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Checking the package data writing on GOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Communication module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Option unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Conversion cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Serial multi-drop connection unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Field network adapter unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Precautions when installing units on top of one another . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 GOT connector specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Coaxial cable connector connection method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Terminating resistors of GOT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Setting the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

1.5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Check on the GOT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Confirming the communication state on the GOT side (For Ethernet connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Confirming the communication state to each station (Station monitoring function). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Check on GX Developer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Check on GX Works2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Check on the PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

PART 2 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC PLC CONNECTIONS

CHAPTER 2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 92 2.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 2.2 Access Range for Monitoring when Using Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 2.3 CC-Link System Access Range for Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 2.4 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on the Data Link System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

C O

N TE

N TS

2.5 Access Range for Monitoring when Connecting FXCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 2.6 Connection to Remote I/O Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 2.7 Connection to the Head Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

CHAPTER 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 117 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Connection to built-in Ethernet port CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Connection to Ethernet module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Connection to CC-Link IE Controller Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Connection to CC-Link IE Field Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Connection to Remote I/O Station in CC-Link IE Field Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Connection to CC-Link (intelligent device station). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 When connecting via the serial communication unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 When connecting via the extension base unit for the redundant system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

3.2 MELSEC Q Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Connection to remote I/O station in MELSECNET/H network system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Direct CPU connection (serial) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 CC-Link connection (Intelligent device station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 CC-Link connection (Via G4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 connections (Network systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 CC-Link IE controller network connection (Network system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Ethernet connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Connection to the redundant type extension base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Switch the Monitor Target to the Control System Using the Script Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

3.3 MELSEC Redundant Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

CHAPTER 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 217 4.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

PLC/Motion CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Ethernet module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

4.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Connection to Ethernet module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Connection to Built-in Ethernet port CPU or C Controller module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Connection to Display I/F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Connection to NZ2GF-ETB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Connection to PERIPHERAL I/F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Connection to CC-Link IE TSN-equipped module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Connection to Motion module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Connection through a servo amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

4.3 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Communication detail settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 GOT Ethernet Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Connected Ethernet controller setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Routing parameter setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

4.4 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Connection to MELSEC iQ-R series Built-in Ethernet port CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Connection to Ethernet module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

13

14

Connection to C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Connection to MELSECWinCPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Connection to MELSEC iQ-F Series built-in Ethernet port CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Connection to Ethernet module (MELSEC iQ-F Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Connection to MELSEC-Q/L series Built-in Ethernet port CPU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Connection to Ethernet module (Q/L Series). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Connection to C Controller module (Q Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Connection to Ethernet module (QnA Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Connection to Ethernet module (A Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Connection to Ethernet module (FX Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Connection to Built-in Ethernet port FXCPU (FX3GE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Connection to Display I/F (CNC C70) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Connection to NZ2GF-ETB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Connection to PERIPHERAL I/F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Connection to CC-Link IE TSN-equipped module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Connection to built-in Ethernet port of Motion module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 Connection to Motion module through Built-in Ethernet port of PLC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

4.5 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

CHAPTER 5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 375 5.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 5.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

Connection to QCPU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 Connection to LCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 Connection to QnACPU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Connection to ACPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 Connection to MELSEC iQ-F Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Connection to FXCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 Connection to WSCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 Connection to the Motion CPU (Q170MCPU, Q170MSCPU(-S1)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414

5.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 RS-232 cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 RS-422 cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418

5.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Communication detail settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

5.5 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 L6ADP-R4 adapter settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 GX Works2 settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431

5.6 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432

CHAPTER 6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION 435 6.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435

PLC/Motion CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 Serial communication module/Computer link module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

6.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 Connection to MELSEC iQ-R series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 Connection to QCPU (Q mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 Connection to LCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 Connection to QCPU (A mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446

C O

N TE

N TS

Connection to QnACPU (QnACPU type). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 Connection to QnACPU (QnASCPU type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 Connection to ACPU (AnCPU type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 Connection to ACPU (AnSCPU type, A0J2HCPU, A2CCPUC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455

6.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457 RS-232 cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457 RS-422 cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460

6.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462 Communication detail settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463

6.5 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472 Connecting to MELSEC iQ-R series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 Connecting to MELSEC-Q, L series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474 Connection to MELSEC-QnA series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 Connecting to MELSEC-A series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480

6.6 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485

CHAPTER 7 BUS CONNECTION 487 7.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 7.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492

Connection to QCPU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492 Connection to QnACPU or AnCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496 Connection to QnASCPU or AnSCPU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499 Connection to A0J2HCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504 Connection to Motion CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505

7.3 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515 Communication detail settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516

7.4 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526 GT15-CEXSS-1, GT15-CBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526 Turning the GOT ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527 Powering OFF the GOT, reapplying the power (OFF to ON). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528 Reset switch on GOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528 Powering OFF or resetting the PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528 Position of the GOT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529 When the GOT is bus-connected to a PLC CPU without the communication driver written . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529 When designing the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529 When assigning GOT I/O signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529 Connection to a QCPU (Q mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529 Connection to a QnA(S)CPU or An(S)CPU type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531 Connection to multiple GOTs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532 When using a PLC CPU in the direct mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533 Connection to a Q4ARCPU redundant system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533 When monitoring Q170MCPU, Q170MSCPU(-S1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534 Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534

CHAPTER 8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 535

8.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535 PLC/Motion CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536

15

16

MELSECNET/H network module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541 MELSECNET/H (NET/10 mode), MELSECNET/10 network module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541

8.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542 Connection to optical loop system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542 Connection to the coaxial bus system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544

8.3 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546 Communication detail settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547 Routing parameter setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552

8.4 PLC side setting when connecting to MELSECNET/H. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553 System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553 Switch setting of MELSECNET/H network module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554 Parameter setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555 [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561

8.5 PLC side setting when connecting to MELSECNET/10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562 Connection to MELSECNET/H network module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562 Connection to MELSECNET/10 network module (QnA Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571 Connection to MELSECNET/10 network module (A Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579

8.6 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586

CHAPTER 9 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION 589 9.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589

PLC/Motion CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589 CC-Link IE TSN-equipped module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595 Motion module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595

9.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596 9.3 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598

Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598 Communication detail settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599 Routing parameter setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605

9.4 PLC Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606 System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606 [Parameter] in GX Works3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607 [Controller Setting] in GT Designer3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611

9.5 CC-Link IE TSN Communication Unit Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612 Firmware versions and supported functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612 How to check the firmware version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612 Firmware update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613 Precautions for firmware update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615

9.6 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616

CHAPTER 10 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 619 10.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619

PLC/Motion CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619 CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625

10.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626 Connection to optical loop system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626

10.3 GOT side settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627 Communication detail settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628

C O

N TE

N TS

Routing parameter setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633 10.4 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634

Connection to MELSEC iQ-R series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634 Connection to C Controller / MELSECWinCPU module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639 Connection to MELSEC-Q, L series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644

10.5 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655

CHAPTER 11 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 659 11.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659

PLC/Motion CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659 CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665

11.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666 Connection to CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666

11.3 GOT side settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668 Communication detail settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669 Routing parameter setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675

11.4 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676 Connection to MELSEC iQ-R series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676 Connection to C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679 Connection to MELSEC-Q, L series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681

11.5 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686

CHAPTER 12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 689 12.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689

PLC/Motion CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689 CC-Link module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695

12.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696 Connection with CC-Link Ver.1 compatible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696 Connection with CC-Link Ver.2 compatible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698 Connection with CC-Link Ver.1/Ver.2 compatibles mixed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699

12.3 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700 Communication detail settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701

12.4 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706 Connection to MELSEC iQ-R Series with Ver.1 compatible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708 Connection to MELSEC iQ-R Series with Ver.2 compatible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711 Connection to MELSEC iQ-R Series with Ver.1/Ver.2 compatibles mixed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714 Connection to C Controller / MELSECWinCPU module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717 Connection to MELSEC-Q Series with Ver.1 compatible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720 Connection to MELSEC-Q Series with Ver.2 compatible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726 Connection to MELSEC-Q Series with Ver.1/Ver.2 compatibles mixed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732 Connection to MELSEC-L series with CC-Link Ver.1 compatible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739 Connection to MELSEC-L series with CC-Link Ver.2 compatible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 742 Connection to MELSEC-QnA series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745 Connection to MELSEC-A series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753 Connection to MELSEC iQ-F and MELSEC-FX Series with Ver.1/Ver.2 compatibles mixed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762 Connection to MELSEC iQ-F Series with Ver.1/Ver.2 compatibles mixed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769

12.5 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772

17

18

CHAPTER 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 777 13.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 777

PLC/Motion CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 777 CC-Link module/peripheral module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782

13.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 783 Connection to QCPU (Q mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 783 Connection to LCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785

13.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788 RS-232 cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788 RS-422 cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789

13.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790 Communication detail settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 791

13.5 PLC Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796 Connection AJ65BT-G4-S3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796 Connection AJ65BT-R2N. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798 Switch setting of CC-Link module (Q series). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800 [Network parameter] of GX Developer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801 Parameter setting (when connecting to C Controller module (Q Series)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 [Controller Setting] in GT Designer3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805

13.6 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806

PART 3 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA DEVICE CONNECTIONS

CHAPTER 14 MELIPC CONNECTION 808 14.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808 14.2 Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808

Connection to MELIPC(MI5122-VW). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808 GOT side settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 810 MELIPC Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817

14.3 CC-Link IE Field Network Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823 Connection to MELIPC(MI5122-VW). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823 GOT side settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 824 MELIPC Side Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829

14.4 Settable Device Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831

CHAPTER 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 833 15.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833 15.2 Serial Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838

Connection to FR-A500(L), FR-F500(L), or FR-V500(L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838 Connection to FR-E500, FR-S500(E), FR-F500J, FR-D700, or FR-F700PJ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841 Connection to FR-E700 or sensorless servo (FR-E70EX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 843 Connection to FR-A700, FR-F700, or FR-F700P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 846 Connection to FR-A800, FR-A800 Plus, FR-F800, or FR-E800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 850 Connection to MELIPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856 Connection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 858 GOT side settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 867 FREQROL series inverter side settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 870

C O

N TE

N TS

Station number setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 892 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893

15.3 Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 895 Connection to FR-E700, FR-A800, FR-A800 Plus, FR-F800, or FR-E800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 895 GOT side settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 897 Inverter side settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 901 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905

15.4 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 906 Connection to FR-A800, FR-F800, or FR-E800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 906 GOT Side Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 907 PLC side settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 911 Inverter side settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 914 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 916

15.5 Connection through a PLC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 917 Connection to FR-E700, FR-A800, FR-A800 Plus, FR-F800, or FR-E800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 917 GOT side settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 918 Inverter side settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 919 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 920

15.6 Settable Device Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921 Direct connection to inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921 Connection to inverter through PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921

CHAPTER 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 923 16.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 923 16.2 Serial Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 925

Connection to the MELSERVO-J2-Super Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 925 Connection to the MELSERVO-J2M Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 927 Connection to the MELSERVO-J4, J3 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 929 Connection to the MELSERVO-JE-A Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 933 Connection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 934 GOT side settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 939 Servo amplifier side settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 941 Station number setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 944

16.3 Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 945 Connection to the MELSERVO-J5 or JET series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 945 Connection to the MELSERVO-JE-C Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 948 GOT side settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 950 Servo amplifier side settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 956

16.4 Connection through a PLC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 964 Connection to MELSERVO-J4 series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 964 Connection to MELSERVO-J5 or JET series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 966 Connection to MELSERVO-JE-B series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 970 GOT side settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 971

16.5 Settable Device Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 972 Direct connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 972 Connection through Motion controller or PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 972

16.6 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 973

19

20

CHAPTER 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 975 17.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975 17.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 976

Connection to robot controller (CR800-D, CRnD-700) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 976 17.3 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 977

Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 977 Communication detail settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 978 GOT Ethernet setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 982 Connected Ethernet controller setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 983

17.4 Robot Controller Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 984 Connection to robot controller (CR800-D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 984 Connection to robot controller (CRnD-700) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 986

17.5 Settable Device Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989 17.6 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989

CHAPTER 18 CNC CONNECTION 991 18.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991 18.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992

Direct CPU connection (serial) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992 MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 993 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 994 Ethernet connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 995

18.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 996 RS-232 cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 996

18.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997 Communication detail settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998 GOT Ethernet setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1006 Connected Ethernet controller setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1007

18.5 CNC Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1008 MELSECNET/10 connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1008 CC-Link(ID) connection to MELDAS C6/C64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1011 CC-Link(ID) connection to M800/M80, M700VS/M70V series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1014 Ethernet connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1014

18.6 Settable Device Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1016 18.7 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1016

Direct CPU connection (serial) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1016 MELSECNET/10 connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1016 CC-Link (ID) connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1017 Ethernet connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1018

CHAPTER 19 LASER DISPLACEMENT SENSOR MH11 CONNECTION 1019 19.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1019 19.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1019

Connection to the Laser Displacement Sensor MH11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1019 19.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1020

RS-232 cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1020 19.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1021

Setting the communication interface (Controller setting). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1021 Communication detail settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1022

C O

N TE

N TS

19.5 Laser Displacement Sensor MH11 Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1023 Connection to laser displacement sensor MH11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1023

19.6 Settable Device Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1023

PART 4 MULTIPLE GOT CONNECTIONS

CHAPTER 20 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 1026 20.1 CPU that can be Monitored. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1026 20.2 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1027

Direct CPU connection (serial) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1027 Serial communication connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034 [Controller Type] and [Communication driver] of GT Designer3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1041

20.3 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1042 When the RS-485 terminal block conversion unit is not used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1042 When the RS-485 terminal block conversion unit is used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1043

20.4 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1045 RS-485 cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1045

20.5 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1051 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1051 Communication detail settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1052

20.6 Settings of Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1053 Write the OS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1053 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1054 Setting switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1059

20.7 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1060

CHAPTER 21 MULTIPLE-GT21 CONNECTION FUNCTION 1063 21.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1063 21.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1064

Connection to PLC via RS-232 interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1064 Connection to PLC via RS-422 interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1067

21.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1070 RS-232 cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1070 RS-422 cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1072

21.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1075 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1075 Communication detail settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1078

21.5 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1082

PART 5 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION

CHAPTER 22 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 1086 22.1 What is Multi-channel Function? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1086 22.2 System Configuration Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1088

Example of bus connection or serial connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1088 Example of multi-channel Ethernet connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1090

22.3 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1091 Basics of interface selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1091 General flow from system selection to drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1093

21

22

Determining the connection type and channel No. (System selection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1094 Determining the GOT side interface (Interface selection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100 Setting for communication settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1107 Items to be checked before starting drawing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1110

22.4 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1112 Precautions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1112

22.5 Multi-channel Function Check Sheet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1113

PART 6 FA TRANSPARENT

CHAPTER 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 1118 23.1 FA Transparent Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1118 23.2 Compatible Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1119 23.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1131 23.4 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1180

GX Series, MX Series, for C Controller module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1180 PX Developer, GX Configurator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1186 MT Developer, MT Works2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1187 MR Configurator, MR Configurator2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1191 FR Configurator, FR Configurator2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1194 FX Configurator-FP, FX Configurator-EN-L, FX Configurator-EN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1197 RT ToolBox2, RT ToolBox3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1198 NC Configurator2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1199 MI Configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200

23.5 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1202 RS-232 cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1202

23.6 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1203 Setting communication interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1203

23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1207 Accessing by GX Works3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1207 Accessing by CW Configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1245 Accessing the PLC by the PX Developer, GX Configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1263 Accessing by GX Works2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1270 Accessing by GX LogViewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1298 Accessing PLC by GX Configurator-QP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1299 Accessing by the MT Developer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1301 Accessing by the MT Works2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1303 Accessing the servo amplifier by the MR Configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1314 Accessing the servo amplifier by the MR Configurator2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1314 Accessing the inverter by the FR Configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1315 Accessing the inverter by the FR Configurator2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1316 Accessing PLC by FX Configurator-FP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1322 Accessing by FX Configurator-EN-L or FX Configurator-EN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1323 Accessing by RT ToolBox3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1324 Accessing by RT ToolBox2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1337 Accessing by NC Configurator2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1341 Accessing by MELSOFT Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1342 Accessing by CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1343 Accessing by Setting/ Monitoring tool for C Controller module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1344 Accessing by MX Component (MX Sheet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1348

C O

N TE

N TS

Accessing by MI Configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1353 23.8 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1360

Precautions common to each software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1360 When using GX Works3, GX Works2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1363 When using MT Developer, MT Works2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1365 When using MR Configurator, MR Configurator2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1365 When using FR Configurator, FR Configurator2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1366

APPENDIX 1367 Appendix 1 Settable Device Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1367

Device setting dialog (Mitsubishi Electric equipment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1368 [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1377 [MELSEC iQ-F] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1463 [MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700] . . . . . 1480 [MELSEC QnA, MELDAS C6*] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1498 [MELSEC-L]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1502 [MELSEC-A] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1516 [MELSEC-FX] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1520 [MELSEC-WS]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1527 [MELIPC] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1532 [MELSERVO-J2M-P8A]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1534 [MELSERVO-J2M-*DU]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1541 [MELSERVO-J2S-*A] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1549 [MELSERVO-J2S-*CP] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1557 [MELSERVO-J2S-*CL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1567 [MELSERVO-J3-*A]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1576 [MELSERVO-J3-*T]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1586 [MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1599 [MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1616 [MELSERVO-JE-*C] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1639 [MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1657 [FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1692 [FREQROL 800] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1701 [FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1709 [Laser Displacement Sensor MH11] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1729

REVISIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1731 WARRANTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1735 Intellectual Property Rights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1736

23

24

INTRODUCTION Thank you for choosing Mitsubishi Electric Graphic Operation Terminal (GOT). Before using the product, read this manual carefully and make sure you understand the functions and performance of the GOT for correct use. Manuals for GT Works3 Abbreviations, Generic Terms, and Model Icons

Manuals for GT Works3 The electronic manuals related to this product are installed together with the screen design software. If you need the printed manuals, consult your local sales office.

Manuals for GT Designer3 (GOT2000)

e-Manual refers to the Mitsubishi Electric FA electronic book manuals that can be browsed using a dedicated tool. e-Manual has the following features: Required information can be cross-searched in multiple manuals. Other manuals can be accessed from the links in the manual. Hardware specifications of each part can be found from the product figures. Pages that users often browse can be bookmarked. Sample programs can be copied to the engineering tool.

Screen design software-related manuals

Connection manuals

Manual name Manual number (Model code)

Format

GT Works3 Installation Instructions - PDF

GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual SH-081220ENG (1D7ML9)

PDF e-Manual

GT Converter2 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3 SH-080862ENG (1D7MB2)

PDF e-Manual

GOT2000 Series MES Interface Function Manual for GT Works3 Version1 SH-081228ENG PDF e-Manual

Manual name Manual number (Model code)

Format

GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) For GT Works3 Version1 SH-081197ENG (1D7MJ8)

PDF e-Manual

GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 1) For GT Works3 Version1 SH-081198ENG PDF e-Manual

GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 2) For GT Works3 Version1 SH-081199ENG PDF e-Manual

GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Microcomputers, MODBUS/Fieldbus Products, Peripherals) For GT Works3 Version1

SH-081200ENG PDF e-Manual

GOT2000 Series Handy GOT Connection Manual For GT Works3 Version1 SH-081867ENG (1D7MS9)

PDF e-Manual

GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (2 Connection) for GT Works3 Version1 JY997D52301 PDF e-Manual

GT SoftGOT2000 manuals

GOT2000 series user's manuals

GOT SIMPLE series user's manuals

Manuals related to GT Works3 add-on projects

Manuals for GT Designer3 (GOT1000) Refer to the Help and manuals for GT Designer3 (GOT1000).

Manual name Manual number (Model code)

Format

GT SoftGOT2000 Version1 Operating Manual SH-081201ENG PDF e-Manual

MELSOFT GT OPC UA Client Operating Manual SH-082174ENG PDF

Manual name Manual number (Model code)

Format

GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Hardware) SH-081194ENG (1D7MJ5)

PDF e-Manual

GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) SH-081195ENG (1D7MJ6)

PDF e-Manual

GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Monitor) SH-081196ENG (1D7MJ7)

PDF e-Manual

Manual name Manual number Format GOT SIMPLE Series User's Manual JY997D52901 PDF

e-Manual

Manual name Manual number (Model code)

Format

GT Works3 Add-on License for GOT2000 Enhanced Drive Control (Servo) Project Data Manual (Fundamentals)

SH-082072ENG (1D7MV1)

PDF e-Manual

GT Works3 Add-on License for GOT2000 Enhanced Drive Control (Servo) Project Data Manual (Screen Details)

SH-082074ENG (1D7MV3)

PDF e-Manual

25

26

Abbreviations, Generic Terms, and Model Icons The following shows the abbreviations, generic terms, and model icons used in this manual.

GOT GOT2000 series Abbreviations and generic terms Description Meaning of icon

Available Unavailable GT27 GT27-X GT2715-X GT2715-XTBA

GT2715-XTBD -

GT27-S GT2712-S GT2712-STBA GT2712-STWA GT2712-STBD GT2712-STWD

GT2710-S GT2710-STBA GT2710-STBD

GT2708-S GT2708-STBA GT2708-STBD

GT27-V GT2710-V GT2710-VTBA GT2710-VTWA GT2710-VTBD GT2710-VTWD

GT2708-V GT2708-VTBA GT2708-VTBD

GT2705-V GT2705-VTBD

GT25 All GT25 models -

GT25-W GT2512-WX GT2512-WXTBD GT2512-WXTSD

-

GT2510-WX GT2510-WXTBD GT2510-WXTSD

GT2507-W GT2507-WTBD GT2507-WTSD

GT2507T-W GT2507T-WTSD

GT25-S GT2512-S GT2512-STBA GT2512-STBD

GT2512F-S GT2512F-STNA GT2512F-STND

GT25-V GT2510-V GT2510-VTBA, GT2510-VTWA GT2510-VTBD GT2510-VTWD

GT2510F-V GT2510F-VTNA GT2510F-VTND

GT2508-V GT2508-VTBA GT2508-VTWA GT2508-VTBD GT2508-VTWD

GT2508F-V GT2508F-VTNA GT2508F-VTND

GT2505-V GT2505-VTBD

GT25HS-V Handy GOT

GT2506HS-V GT2506HS-VTBD -

GT2505HS-V GT2505HS-VTBD -

GT23 GT23-V GT2310-V GT2310-VTBA GT2310-VTBD

-

GT2308-V GT2308-VTBA GT2308-VTBD

GOT SIMPLE series

GOT1000 series, GOT900 series, and GOT800 series

GT21 All GT21 models -

GT21-W GT2107-W GT2107-WTBD GT2107-WTSD

-

GT21-Q GT2105-Q GT2105-QTBDS GT2105-QMBDS

-

GT21-R GT2104-R GT2104-RTBD -

GT21-P GT2104-P GT2104-PMBD -

GT2104-PMBDS -

GT2104-PMBDS2 -

GT2104-PMBLS -

GT2103-P GT2103-PMBD -

GT2103-PMBDS -

GT2103-PMBDS2 -

GT2103-PMBLS -

GT SoftGOT2000 GT SoftGOT2000 Version1 -

Abbreviations and generic terms Description Meaning of icon

Available Unavailable GS21 GS21-W-N GS2110-WTBD-N

GS2107-WTBD-N -

GS21-W GS2110-WTBD GS2107-WTBD

Abbreviations and generic terms Description Meaning of icon

Available Unavailable GOT1000 Series GOT1000 Series -

GOT900 Series GOT-A900 Series GOT-F900 Series

-

GOT800 Series GOT-800 Series -

Abbreviations and generic terms Description Meaning of icon

Available Unavailable

27

28

Communication unit

Option unit

Abbreviations and generic terms Description Bus connection unit GT15-QBUS

GT15-QBUS2 GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 GT15-75QBUSL GT15-75QBUS2L GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L

Serial communication unit GT15-RS2-9P GT15-RS4-9S GT15-RS4-TE

MELSECNET/H communication unit GT15-J71LP23-25 GT15-J71BR13

CC-Link IE TSN communication unit GT25-J71GN13-T2

CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit GT15-J71GP23-SX

CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit GT15-J71GF13-T2

CC-Link communication unit GT15-J61BT13

Wireless LAN communication unit GT25-WLAN

Serial multi-drop connection unit GT01-RS4-M

Connection conversion adapter GT10-9PT5S

Field network adapter unit GT25-FNADP

Ethernet communication unit GT25-J71E71-100

RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter GT14-RS2T4-9P

Abbreviations and generic terms Description Printer unit GT15-PRN

Video input unit GT27-V4-Z (A set of GT16M-V4-Z and GT27-IF1000)

RGB input unit GT27-R2 GT27-R2-Z (A set of GT16M-R2-Z and GT27-IF1000)

Video/RGB input unit GT27-V4R1-Z (A set of GT16M-V4R1-Z and GT27-IF1000)

RGB output unit GT27-ROUT GT27-ROUT-Z (A set of GT16M-ROUT-Z and GT27-IF1000)

Digital video output unit GT27-VHOUT

Multimedia unit GT27-MMR-Z (A set of GT16M-MMR-Z and GT27-IF1000)

Video signal conversion unit GT27-IF1000

External I/O unit GT15-DIO GT15-DIOR

Sound output unit GT15-SOUT

SD card unit GT21-03SDCD

Option Abbreviations and generic terms Description SD card NZ1MEM-2GBSD

NZ1MEM-4GBSD NZ1MEM-8GBSD NZ1MEM-16GBSD L1MEM-2GBSD L1MEM-4GBSD

Battery GT11-50BAT GT15-BAT

Protective sheet GT27-15PSGC GT25-12WPSGC GT25-12PSGC GT25-10WPSGC GT25-10PSGC GT25-08PSGC GT21-07WPSGC GT25T-07WPSVC GT25-05PSGC GT25-05PSGC-2 GT21-05PSGC GT21-04RPSGC-UC GT21-03PSGC-UC GT21-04PSGC-UC GT27-15PSCC GT25-12WPSCC GT25-12PSCC GT25-10WPSCC GT25-10PSCC GT25-08PSCC GT25-05PSCC GT25-05PSCC-2 GT25-12PSCC-UC GT25-10PSCC-UC GT25-08PSCC-UC GT21-07WPSCC GT21-05PSCC GT21-04RPSCC-UC GT21-04PSCC-UC GT21-03PSCC-UC GT16H-60PSC GT14H-50PSC

Antibacterial/antiviral protective sheet GT25-12PSAC GT25-10PSAC GT25-08PSAC

Environmental protection sheet GT25F-12ESGS GT25F-10ESGS GT25F-08ESGS

Protective cover for oil GT20-15PCO GT20-12PCO GT20-10PCO GT20-08PCO GT21-12WPCO GT21-10WPCO GT21-07WPCO GT25T-07WPCO GT25-05PCO GT25-05PCO-2 GT05-50PCO GT21-04RPCO GT10-30PCO GT10-20PCO

USB environmental protection cover GT25-UCOV GT25-05UCOV GT21-WUCOV

29

30

Software Software related to GOT

Software related to iQ Works

Stand GT15-90STAND GT15-80STAND GT15-70STAND GT05-50STAND GT25-10WSTAND GT21-07WSTAND GT25T-07WSTAND

Attachment GT15-70ATT-98 GT15-70ATT-87 GT15-60ATT-97 GT15-60ATT-96 GT15-60ATT-87 GT15-60ATT-77 GT21-04RATT-40

Panel-mounted USB port extension GT14-C10EXUSB-4S GT10-C10EXUSB-5S

Connector conversion box GT16H-CNB-42S GT16H-CNB-37S GT11H-CNB-37S

Emergency stop switch guard cover GT16H-60ESCOV GT14H-50ESCOV

Wall-mounting attachment GT14H-50ATT

Abbreviations and generic terms Description GT Works3 SW1DND-GTWK3-J, SW1DND-GTWK3-E, SW1DND-GTWK3-C

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen design software GT Designer3 for GOT2000 and GOT1000 series

GT Designer3 Screen design software for GOT2000 series included in GT Works3

GT Designer3 (GOT2000)

GT Designer3 (GOT1000) Screen design software for GOT1000 series included in GT Works3

Speech synthesis license GT Works Text to Speech License (SW1DND-GTVO-M)

Add-on license GT Works3 add-on license for GOT2000 enhanced drive control (servo) project data (SW1DND-GTSV-MZ)

GENESIS64 Advanced GENESIS64 server application (GEN64-APP)

GENESIS64 Basic SCADA GENESIS64 server application (GEN64-BASIC)

GENESIS64 Generic term of GENESIS64 Advanced and GENESIS64 Basic SCADA

GOT Mobile function license for GT SoftGOT2000 License required to use the GOT Mobile function with GT SoftGOT2000 (SGT2K- WEBSKEY-)

GT Simulator3 Screen simulator GT Simulator3 for GOT2000, GOT1000, and GOT900 series

GT SoftGOT2000 GOT2000 compatible HMI software GT SoftGOT2000

GT OPC UA Client MELSOFT GT OPC UA Client (SW1DNN-GTOUC-MD)

GT Converter2 Data conversion software GT Converter2 for GOT1000 and GOT900 series

GT Designer2 Classic Screen design software GT Designer2 Classic for GOT900 series

GT Designer2 Screen design software GT Designer2 for GOT1000 and GOT900 series

DU/WIN Screen design software FX-PCS-DU/WIN for GOT-F900 series

Abbreviations and generic terms Description iQ Works iQ Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works

MELSOFT Navigator Integrated development environment software included in SW DND-IQWK (iQ Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works) ( represents a version.)

MELSOFT iQ AppPortal SWDND-IQAPL-M type integrated application management software ( represents a version.)

Abbreviations and generic terms Description

Other software

License key (for GT SoftGOT2000)

Abbreviations and generic terms Description GX Works3 SW DND-GXW3-E (-EA, -EAZ) type programmable controller engineering software

( represents a version.)

GX Works2 SW DNC-GXW2-E (-EA, -EAZ) type programmable controller engineering software ( represents a version.)

Controller simulator GX Simulator3 Simulation function of GX Works3

GX Simulator2 Simulation function of GX Works2

GX Simulator SW D5C-LLT-E (-EV) type ladder logic test tool function software package (SW5D5C-LLT (-V) or later versions) ( represents a version.)

GX Developer SW D5C-GPPW-E (-EV)/SW D5F-GPPW (-V) type software package ( represents a version.)

GX LogViewer SW DNN-VIEWER-E type software package ( represents a version.)

MI Configurator Configuration and monitor tool for Mitsubishi Electric industrial computers (SWDNNMICONF-M) ( represents a version.)

PX Developer SW D5C-FBDQ-E type FBD software package for process control ( represents a version.)

MT Works2 Motion controller engineering environment MELSOFT MT Works2 (SW DNDMTW2-E) ( represents a version.)

MT Developer SWRNC-GSV type integrated start-up support software for motion controller Q series ( represents a version.)

CW Configurator Setting/monitoring tools for the C Controller module and MELSECWinCPU (SWDND-RCCPU-E) ( represents a version.)

MR Configurator2 SW DNC-MRC2-E type servo configuration software ( represents a version.)

MR Configurator MRZJW-SETUP type servo configuration software ( represents a version.)

FR Configurator2 Inverter setup software (SW DND-FRC2-E) ( represents a version.)

FR Configurator Inverter setup software (FR-SW -SETUP-WE) ( represents a version.)

NC Configurator2 CNC parameter setting support tool (FCSB1221)

NC Configurator CNC parameter setting support tool

FX Configurator-FP Parameter setting, monitoring, and testing software package for FX3U-20SSCH (SW D5CFXSSCE) ( represents a version.)

FX Configurator-EN-L FX3U-ENET-L type Ethernet module setting software (SW1D5-FXENETL-E)

FX Configurator-EN FX3U-ENET type Ethernet module setting software (SW1D5C-FXENET-E)

RT ToolBox2 Robot program creation software (3D-11C-WINE)

RT ToolBox3 Robot program creation software (3F-14C-WINE)

MX Component MX Component Version (SW D5C-ACT-E, SW D5C-ACT-EA) ( represents a version.)

MX Sheet MX Sheet Version (SW D5C-SHEET-E, SW D5C-SHEET-EA) ( represents a version.)

CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool CPU module logging configuration tool (SW1DNN-LLUTL-E)

Abbreviations and generic terms Description License key GT27-SGTKEY-U

31

32

Others Abbreviations and generic terms Description IAI IAI Corporation

AZBIL Azbil Corporation

OMRON OMRON Corporation

KEYENCE KEYENCE CORPORATION

KOYO EI KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.

JTEKT JTEKT CORPORATION

SHARP Sharp Corporation

SHINKO Shinko Technos Co., Ltd.

CHINO CHINO CORPORATION

TOSHIBA TOSHIBA CORPORATION

SHIBAURA MACHINE SHIBAURA MACHINE CO., LTD.

PANASONIC Panasonic Corporation

PANASONIC IDS Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co., Ltd.

HITACHI IES Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co., Ltd.

HITACHI Hitachi, Ltd.

HIRATA Hirata Corporation

FUJI FUJI ELECTRIC CO., LTD.

MURATEC Muratec products manufactured by Murata Machinery, Ltd.

YASKAWA YASKAWA Electric Corporation

YOKOGAWA Yokogawa Electric Corporation

RKC RKC INSTRUMENT INC.

ALLEN-BRADLEY Allen-Bradley products manufactured by Rockwell Automation, Inc.

CLPA CC-Link Partner Association

GE GE Intelligent Platforms, Inc.

HMS HMS Industrial Networks

LS IS LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd.

MITSUBISHI INDIA Mitsubishi Electric India Pvt. Ltd.

ODVA Open DeviceNet Vendor Association, Inc.

SCHNEIDER Schneider Electric SA

SICK SICK AG

SIEMENS Siemens AG

SCHNEIDER EJH Schneider Electric Japan Holdings Ltd.

PLC Programmable controller manufactured by its respective company

Control equipment Control equipment manufactured by its respective company

Temperature controller Temperature controller manufactured by its respective company

Indicating controller Indicating controller manufactured by its respective company

Controller Controller manufactured by its respective company

TSN Switch CC-Link IE TSN Class B (Synchronized Realtime Communication) hub certified by CC-Link Partner Association

General-purpose Switch CC-Link IE TSN Class A (Realtime Communication) hub certified by CC-Link Partner Association

CC-Link IE TSN-equipped module Generic term for the following CC-Link IE TSN master/local modules and CC-Link IE TSN Plus master/local module RJ71GN11-T2 RJ71GN11-EIP FX5-CCLGN-MS

PART 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING

33

34

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING

Page 35 Setting the Communication Interface Page 57 Writing the Package Data onto the GOT Page 59 Option Devices for the Respective Connection Page 64 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection Page 74 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment Page 76 Checking for Normal Monitoring The following shows the procedures to be taken before monitoring and corresponding reference sections.

1. Setting the communication interface Determine the connection type and channel No. to be used, and perform the communication setting. Page 35 Setting the Communication Interface Each chapter GOT Side Settings

2. Writing the package data Write the project data, system application onto the GOT. Page 57 Writing the Package Data onto the GOT

3. Verifying the package data Verify the project data, system application are properly written onto the GOT. Page 58 Checking the package data writing on GOT

4. Attaching the communication unit and connecting the cable Mount the optional equipment and prepare/connect the connection cable according to the connection type. Page 59 Option Devices for the Respective Connection Page 64 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection Each chapter System Configuration Each chapter Connection Diagram

5. Verifying GOT recognizes connected equipment Verify the GOT recognizes controllers on [Communication Settings] of the Utility. Page 74 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment

6. Verifying the GOT is monitoring normally Verify the GOT is monitoring normally using Utility, Developer, etc. Page 76 Checking for Normal Monitoring

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING

1

1.1 Setting the Communication Interface Set the communication interface of GOT and the connected equipment. When using the GOT at the first time, make sure to set the channel of communication interface and the communication driver before writing to GOT. Set the communication interface of the GOT at [Controller Setting] and [I/F Communication Setting] in GT Designer3.

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface 35

36

When using the parameter reflection function of MELSOFT Navigator The system configuration of MELSOFT Navigator can be reflected to the project of GT Designer3 using the parameter function of MELSOFT Navigator. For details of the parameter functions of MELSOFT Navigator, refer to the following. Help of MELSOFT Navigator The color of the cells for the items which are reflected to GT Designer3 from MELSOFT Navigator changes

to green. Set items, which are displayed in green cells, from the MELSOFT Navigator. When changing in GT Designer3, refer to the following (3).

When setting the communication interface for the connection with the iQ Works untargeted equipment, set [Set by GT Designer3] to the channel connected at [Configuration detailed information input] in MELSOFT Navigator and make the settings at [Controller Setting] in GT Designer3.

To make the items reflected from MELSOFT Navigator editable on GT Designer3, select the [Option] menu and put a check mark at [Enable an editing of parameters set in MELSOFT Navigator] in the [iQ Works Interaction] tab.

However, when the items set in MELSOFT Navigator are edited in GT Designer3, the interaction function with MELSOFT Navigator is unavailable due to a mismatch with the system configuration of MELSOFT Navigator. Eliminate mismatches using the parameter verification function etc. before using the interaction function of MELSOFT Navigator.

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface

1

Setting connected equipment (Channel setting) Set the channel of the equipment connected to the GOT.

Setting

1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the menu.

2. The Controller Setting dialog box appears. Select the channel No. to be used from the list menu.

3. Refer to the following explanations for the setting.

Channel No.2 to No.4 Use the channel No.2 to No.4 when using the Multi-channel function. For details of the Multi-channel function, refer to the following. Page 1086 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface 37

38

Setting item This section describes the setting items of the Manufacturer, Controller Type, Driver and I/F. When using the channel No.2 to No.4, put a check mark at [Use CH*].

Setting [Driver] The displayed items for a driver differ according to the settings [Manufacturer], [Controller Type] and [I/F]. When the driver to be set is not displayed, confirm if [Manufacturer], [Controller Type] and [I/F] are correct. For the settings, refer to the following. [Setting the communication interface] section in each chapter

Item Description Use CH* Select this item when setting the channel No.2 to No.4.

Manufacturer Select the manufacturer of the equipment to be connected to the GOT.

Type Select the type of the equipment to be connected to the GOT. For the settings, refer to the following. Page 39 Setting [Controller Type]

I/F Select the interface of the GOT to which the equipment is connected. For the settings, refer to the following. Page 49 Setting [I/F]

Driver Select the communication driver to be written to the GOT. For the settings, refer to the following. Page 38 Setting [Driver] When multiple communication drivers can be selected, this item is displayed. When only one communication driver can be selected, the driver name is displayed under [Detail Setting].

Detail Setting Make settings for the transmission speed and data length of the communication driver. Refer to each chapter of the equipment to be connected to the GOT.

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface

1

Setting [Controller Type] The type differs depending on the PLC to be used. For the settings, refer to the following.

Type Model name [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT,CR800-D] [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT,CR800-D]

R00CPU R01CPU R02CPU R04CPU R08CPU R16CPU R32CPU R120CPU

R16MTCPU R32MTCPU R64MTCPU

R08PCPU R16PCPU R32PCPU R120PCPU

R04ENCPU R08ENCPU R16ENCPU R32ENCPU R120ENCPU

R08PSFCPU R16PSFCPU R32PSFCPU R120PSFCPU

R08SFCPU R16SFCPU R32SFCPU R120SFCPU

R12CCPU-V

R102WCPU-W

CNC C80 *2

(R16NCCPU-S1)

CR800-R(R16RTCPU) CR800-D

MR-J5-B*1

MR-J5-B-RJ*1

MR-J5W2-B*1

MR-J5W3-B*1

MR-J5-G*6

MR-J5-G-RJ*6

MR-J5W2-G*6

MR-J5W3-G*6

MR-J4-B*1

MR-J4-B-RJ*1

MR-J4W2-B*1

MR-J4W3-B*1

MR-J4-GF*1

MR-J4-GF-RJ*1

MR-JE-*B *1

MR-JE-*BF *1

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface 39

40

[MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT,CR800-D] [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT,CR800-D]

FR-E70-NE *4

FR-A80 *4*5

FR-A82 *4*5

FR-A86 *4*5

FR-A80-E *4

FR-A82-E *4

FR-A86-E *4

FR-A80-GF *4

FR-A82-GF *4

FR-A80-GN *4*5

FR-A82-GN *4*5

FR-A80-CRN *4

FR-A82-CRN *4

FR-A80-R2R *4

FR-A82-R2R *4

FR-A80-AWH*4

FR-A80-LC*4

FR-A80-E-CRN *4

FR-A82-E-CRN *4

FR-A80-E-R2R *4

FR-A82-E-R2R *4

FR-A80-E-AWH*4

FR-A80-E-LC*4

FR-F80 *4*5

FR-F82 *4*5

FR-F86 *4*5

FR-F80-E *4

FR-F82-E *4

FR-E80-E *4*5

[MELSEC iQ-F] FX5U FX5UC FX5UJ FX5S

MR-J4-*B *1

MR-JE-*B *1

Type Model name

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface

1

[MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700] [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700]

Q00CPU Q01CPU Q02CPU

Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU

Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU

Q172CPU Q173CPU Q172CPUN Q173CPUN Q172HCPU Q173HCPU

Q00UJCPU Q00UJCPU-S8

Q00UCPU

Q01UCPU

Q02UCPU

Q03UDCPU

Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU

Q03UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU

Q03UDVCPU Q04UDVCPU Q06UDVCPU Q13UDVCPU Q26UDVCPU Q04UDPVCPU

Q12DCCPU-V Q24DHCCPU-V/VG Q24DHCCPU-LS Q26DHCCPU-LS

Q172DCPU Q173DCPU Q172DCPU-S1 Q173DCPU-S1

Q172DSCPU Q173DSCPU Q170MCPU Q170MSCPU Q170MSCPU-S1

MR-MQ100

CNC C70 *2

(Q173NCCPU)

Type Model name

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface 41

42

[MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700] [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700]

CRnQ-700(Q172DRCPU) CR750-Q(Q172DRCPU) CR751-Q(Q172DRCPU) CR800-Q(Q172DSRCPU)

CRnD-700 CR750-D CR751-D

Q00JCPU

Q00CPU

Q01CPU

Q02CPU

Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU

Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU

Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU

QS001CPU

MR-J5-B*1

MR-J5-B-RJ*1

MR-J5W2-B*1

MR-J5W3-B*1

MR-J4-B*1

MR-J4-B-RJ*1

MR-J4W2-B*1

MR-J4W3-B*1

MR-J4-GF*1

MR-J4-GF-RJ*1

MR-JE-*B *1

FR-E70-NE *4

FR-A80 *4

FR-A82 *4

FR-A86 *4

FR-A80-E *4

FR-A82-E *4

FR-A86-E *4

FR-A80-GF *4

FR-A82-GF *4

FR-A80-GN *4

FR-A82-GN *4

FR-A80-CRN *4

FR-A82-CRN *4

FR-A80-R2R *4

FR-A82-R2R *4

FR-A80-AWH*4

FR-A80-LC*4

FR-A80-E-CRN *4

FR-A82-E-CRN *4

FR-A80-E-R2R *4

FR-A82-E-R2R *4

FR-A80-E-AWH*4

FR-A80-E-LC*4

FR-F80 *4

FR-F82 *4

FR-F86 *4

FR-F80-E *4

FR-F82-E *4

FR-E80-E *4

Type Model name

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface

1

[MELSEC-QnA, MELDAS C6*] Q2ACPU

Q2ACPU-S1 Q3ACPU Q4ACPU

Q4ARCPU

Q2ASCPU

Q2ASCPU-S1

Q2ASHCPU

Q2ASHCPU-S1

MELDAS C6 (FCA C6) MELDAS C64 (FCA C64)

M700VS/M70V

M800/M80

[MELSEC-L] L02CPU L06CPU L26CPU L26CPU-BT L02CPU-P L06CPU-P L26CPU-P L26CPU-PBT L02SCPU L02SCPU-P NZ2GF-ETB

MR-J4-*B *1

MR-JE-*B *1

MR-JE-*BF *1

FR-E70-NE *4

FR-A80 *4

FR-A82 *4

FR-A86 *4

FR-A80-E *4

FR-A82-E *4

FR-A86-E *4

FR-A80-GF *4

FR-A82-GF *4

FR-A80-GN *4

FR-A82-GN *4

FR-A80-CRN *4

FR-A82-CRN *4

FR-A80-R2R *4

FR-A82-R2R *4

FR-A80-AWH*4

FR-A80-LC*4

FR-A80-E-CRN *4

FR-A82-E-CRN *4

FR-A80-E-R2R *4

FR-A82-E-R2R *4

FR-A80-E-AWH*4

FR-A80-E-LC*4

FR-F80 *4

FR-F82 *4

FR-F86 *4

FR-F80-E *4

FR-F82-E *4

FR-E80-E *4

Type Model name

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface 43

44

[MELSEC-A] A2UCPU

A2UCPU-S1

A3UCPU

A4UCPU

A2ACPU

A2ACPUP21

A2ACPUR21

A2ACPU-S1

A2ACPUP21-S1

A2ACPUR21-S1

A3ACPU

A3ACPUP21

A3ACPUR21

A1NCPU

A1NCPUP21

A1NCPUR21

A2NCPU

A2NCPUP21

A2NCPUR21

A2NCPU-S1

A2NCPUP21-S1

A2NCPUR21-S1

A3NCPU

A3NCPUP21

A3NCPUR21

A2USCPU

A2USCPU-S1

A2USHCPU-S1

A1SCPU

A1SCPUC24-R2

A1SHCPU

A2SCPU

A2SHCPU

A1SJCPU

A1SJCPU-S3

A1SJHCPU

A0J2HCPU

A0J2HCPUP21

A0J2HCPUR21

A0J2HCPU-DC24

A2CCPU

A2CCPUP21

A2CCPUR21

A2CCPUC24

A2CCPUC24-PRF

A2CJCPU-S3

A1FXCPU

A273UCPU

A273UHCPU

A273UHCPU-S3

A373UCPU

A373UCPU-S3

Type Model name

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface

1

[MELSEC-A] A171SCPU

A171SCPU-S3

A171SCPU-S3N

A171SHCPU

A171SHCPUN

A172SHCPU

A172SHCPUN

A173UHCPU

A173UHCPU-S1

[MELSEC-FX] FX0

FX0S

FX0N

FX1

FX2

FX2C

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX1NC

FX2NC

FX3S

FX3G

FX3GC

FX3GE

FX3U

FX3UC

[MELSEC-WS] WS0-CPU0

WS0-CPU1

WS0-CPU3

[MELIPC] MI5122-VW

[MELSERVO-J2M-P8A] MR-J2M-P8A

[MELSERVO-J2M-*DU] MR-J2M-*DU

[MELSERVO-J2S-*A] MR-J2S-*A

[MELSERVO-J2S-*CP] MR-J2S-*CP

[MELSERVO-J2S-*CL] MR-J2S-*CL

[MELSERVO-J3-*A] MR-J3-*A

[MELSERVO-J3-*T] MR-J3-*T

[MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A] MR-J4-*A MR-JE-*A

[MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ] MR-J4-*A-RJ

[MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G] MR-J5-G(-RJ) MR-J5W2-G MR-J5W3-G MR-J5D-*G4 MR-JET-G

[MELSERVO-JE-*C] MR-JE-*C

Type Model name

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface 45

46

[FREQROL 500/700/800 Series, SENSORLESS SERVO] FR-A50(L)

FR-F50(L)

FR-V50(L)

FR-E50(C)

FR-E50S

FR-E50W

FR-S50(E)(-R)(-C)

FR-S50S(E)(-R)

FR-S50W(E)(-R)

FR-F50J(F)

FR-D70

FR-D70S

FR-D70W

FR-F70PJ(F)

FR-E70

FR-E70S

FR-E70W

FR-A70 *3

FR-F70

FR-F70P

FR-A80 *3

FR-A82 *3

FR-A86 *3

FR-A80-E *3

FR-A82-E *3

FR-A86-E *3

FR-A80-CRN

FR-A82-CRN

FR-A80-R2R

FR-A82-R2R

FR-A80-AWH

FR-A80-LC

FR-A80-E-CRN

FR-A82-E-CRN

FR-A80-E-R2R

FR-A82-E-R2R

FR-A80-E-AWH

FR-A80-E-LC

FR-F80

FR-F82

FR-F86

FR-F80-E

FR-F82-E

FR-E80

FR-E70EX

MD-CX522-K(-A0)

Type Model name

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface

1

[FREQROL 800] FR-A80 *3

FR-A82 *3

FR-A86 *3

FR-A80-E *3

FR-A82-E *3

FR-A86-E *3

FR-A80-CRN

FR-A82-CRN

FR-A80-R2R

FR-A82-R2R

FR-A80-AWH

FR-A80-LC

FR-A80-E-CRN

FR-A82-E-CRN

FR-A80-E-R2R

FR-A82-E-R2R

FR-A80-E-AWH

FR-A80-E-LC

FR-F80

FR-F82

FR-F86

FR-F80-E

FR-F82-E

FR-E80

FRE80-E

[FREQROL 800/E700NE (Batch monitor)] FR-E70-NE

FR-A80

FR-A82

FR-A86

FR-A80-GF

FR-A82-GF

FR-A80-E

FR-A82-E

FR-A86-E

FR-A80-CRN

FR-A82-CRN

FR-A80-R2R

FR-A82-R2R

FR-A80-AWH

FR-A80-LC

FR-A80-E-CRN

FR-A82-E-CRN

FR-A80-E-R2R

FR-A82-E-R2R

FR-A80-E-AWH

FR-A80-E-LC

FR-F80

FR-F82

FR-F86

FR-F80-E

FR-F82-E

FR-E80

FRE80-E

Type Model name

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface 47

48

*1 The models are connected to the GOT through a Motion controller or Simple Motion module. *2 The models cannot be connected with GT21 and GS21. *3 The GOT supports the FR-B/B3 series which is the explosion proof type of FR-A700 series and FR-A800 series. *4 The models are connected to the GOT through a PLC. *5 The models can be connected as a remote station of CC-Link IE TSN. *6 The models are connected to the GOT through a Motion module.

[Laser Displacement Sensor MH11] MH11CTMF-N

MH11CTMF-NNA

MH11CTMF-P

MH11CTMF-PNA

Type Model name

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface

1

Setting [I/F] The interface differs depending on the GOT to be used. Set the I/F according to the connection and the position of communication unit to be mounted onto the GOT.

3rd stage

2nd stage

1st stage

(Example: In the case of the GT27)

Extension interface

Standard interface 1 (RS-232 interface built in the GOT)

Standard interface 2 (USB interface built in the GOT)

Standard interface 3 (RS-422/485 interface built in the GOT)

Standard interface 4 (Ethernet interface built in the GOT)

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface 49

50

GOT Ethernet Setting The GOT can be connected to a different network by using the following network. 1) GOT IP Address Setting Set the following communication port setting. Standard port (When using GT25-W, port 1) Set [GOT IP Address] and [Subnet Mask] in the standard port with a built-in GOT, or port 1. Extended port (When using GT25-W, port 2) Set [GOT IP Address] and [Subnet Mask] in the extended port (the Ethernet interface for the Ethernet communication module), or port 2 with a built-in GOT. When using the GOT other than GT25-W, BootOS Version Z or later is required to use the extended port. For details on writing the BootOS, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Wireless LAN Set [GOT IP Address], [Subnet Mask], [Peripheral S/W Communication Port No.], and [Transparent Port No.] for the wireless LAN interface. 2) GOT Ethernet Common Setting Set the following setting which is common to the standard port and the extended port, or port 1 and port 2. [Default Gateway] [Peripheral S/W Communication Port No.] [Transparent Port No.] 3) IP Filter Setting By configuring the IP filter setting, the access from the specific IP address can be permitted or shut off.

GOT IP Address Setting Set the GOT IP address.

[Standard Port] or [Port 1] The following shows an example for [Standard Port].

1. Select [Common] [GOT Ethernet Setting] [GOT IP Address Setting] from the menu to display the [GOT Ethernet Setting] window.

2. On the [Standard Port] tab, configure the following settings.

Item Description Range Update GOT Ethernet standard port setting The GOT Ethernet standard port settings are applied on GOT. -

GOT IP Address Set the IP address of the GOT IP Address. (Default:192.168.3.18)

0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

Subnet Mask Set the subnet mask for the sub network. (Only for connection via router) If the sub network is not used, the default value is set. (Default: 255.255.255.0)

0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

Select from GOT Setting List Select the GOT set in [GOT Setting List] dialog. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

-

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface

1

[Extended Port], or [Port 2] The following shows an example for [Extended Port].

1. Select [Common] [GOT Ethernet Setting] [GOT IP Address Setting] from the menu to display the [GOT Ethernet Setting] window.

2. On the [Extended Port] tab, configure the following settings.

Item Description Range Update GOT Ethernet extended port setting The GOT Ethernet extended port settings are applied on GOT. -

Enable Ethernet extended port Enable the ethernet extended port. -

GOT IP Address Set the IP address of the GOT IP Address. (Default:192.168.5.22)

0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

Subnet Mask Set the subnet mask for the sub network. (Only for connection via router) If the sub network is not used, the default value is set. (Default: 255.255.255.0)

0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

Select from GOT Setting List Select the GOT set in [GOT Setting List] dialog. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

-

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface 51

52

[Wireless LAN] 1. Select [Common] [GOT Ethernet Setting] [GOT IP Address Setting] from the menu to display the [GOT Ethernet

Setting] window.

2. On the [Wireless LAN] tab, configure the following settings.

GOT IP address For GOT IP address of each Ethernet setting, set a value that network system is different from each other. (When the subnet mask is [255.255.255.0])

Item Description Range Update GOT Wireless LAN I/F setting The wireless LAN interface settings are applied on GOT. -

Enable Wireless LAN I/F Enable the wireless LAN. -

GOT IP Address Set the IP address of the wireless LAN I/F. (Default:192.168.4.20)

0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

Subnet Mask Set the subnet mask for the sub network. (Only for connection via router) If the sub network is not used, the default value is set. (Default: 255.255.255.0)

0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

Select from GOT Setting List Select the GOT set in [GOT Setting List] dialog. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

-

Specify port No. for Wireless LAN Enable the port number setting for the wireless LAN separately from GOT Ethernet common setting.

-

Peripheral S/W Communication Port No. Set the GOT port No. for the communication with the peripheral S/W. (Default: 5015)

1024 to 65534 (Except for 5011 to 5013, 49153 to 49170)

Transparent Port No. Set the GOT port No. for the transparent function. (Default: 5014)

1024 to 65534 (Except for 5011 to 5013, 49153 to 49170)

Driver setting Display [Detail Settings] dialog, GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

-

192.168.4.20

Set a value that network system is different from each other.

GOT wireless LAN I/F setting

192.168.3.18

GOT standard Ethernet setting

192.168.5.22

GOT extension Ethernet setting

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface

1

GOT Ethernet Common Setting Set the following setting which is common to the standard port and the extended port, or port 1 and port 2.

1. Select [Common] [GOT Ethernet Setting] [GOT Ethernet Common Setting] from the menu to display the [GOT Ethernet Setting] window.

2. Configure the following settings.

IP Filter Setting 1. Select [Common] [GOT Ethernet Setting] [IP Filter Setting] from the menu to display the [GOT Ethernet Setting]

window.

2. For the detailed settings, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Item Description Range Default Gateway Set the router address of the default gateway where the GOT is connected.

(Only for connection via router) (Default: 0.0.0.0)

0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

Peripheral S/W Communication Port No. Set the GOT port No. for the communication with the peripheral S/W. (Default: 5015)

1024 to 65534 (Except for 5011 to 5013, 49153 to 49170)

Transparent Port No. Set the GOT port No. for the transparent function. (Default: 5014)

1024 to 65534 (Except for 5011 to 5013, 49153 to 49170)

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface 53

54

I/F communication setting This function displays the list of the GOT communication interfaces. Set the channel and the communication driver to the interface to be used.

Setting

1. Select [Common] [I/F Communication Setting] from the menu.

2. The I/F Communication Setting dialog box appears. Make the settings with reference to the following explanation.

When using the parameter reflection function of MELSOFT Navigator. When setting [Controller Setting] in GT Designer3 using the parameter function of MELSOFT Navigator, all of I/F Communication Setting are grayout and cannot be edited Set these items at [Controller Setting] or [Peripheral Unit Setting].

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface

1

Setting item The following describes the setting items for the standard I/F setting and extension I/F setting. For the detailed explanations, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Item Description Standard I/F Setting Set channel No. and drivers to the GOT standard interfaces.

CH No. Set the CH No. according to the intended purpose. 0: Not used 1 to 4: Used for connecting a controller of channel No. 1 to 4 set in Setting connected equipment (Channel setting) 5 to 8: Used for barcode function, RFID function, remote personal computer operation function (serial) A: Used for the report function (with a serial printer), hard copy function (with a serial printer).

Driver Set the driver for the device to be connected. Each communication driver suitable to the channel numbers Each communication driver for connected devices

Detail Setting Set the detailed settings for the communication driver. Refer to each chapter of the equipment to be connected to the GOT.

I/F-1,I/F-2,I/F-3 The communication type of the GOT standard interface is displayed.

RS232 Setting To validate the 5V power supply function in RS232, mark the [Enable the 5V power supply] checkbox. The RS232 setting is invalid when the CH No. of [I/F-1: RS232] is [9]. Not applicable to GT21 and GS21.

Ethernet Connection Setting Set the channel number and the communication driver to the Ethernet interface with a built-in GOT.

CH No. Set the CH No. according to the intended purpose. 0: Not used 1 to 4: Used for connecting a controller of channel No. 1 to 4 set in Setting connected equipment (Channel setting) 9: Used for connecting Host (PC) or Ethernet download A: Used for the remote personal computer operation function (Ethernet), VNC server function, gateway function, and MES interface function. Multi: Used for multi-channel Ethernet connection

Driver Set the driver for the device to be connected. Each communication driver suitable to the channel numbers Each communication driver for connected devices

Detail Setting Set the detailed settings for the communication driver. Refer to each chapter of the equipment to be connected to the GOT.

When GT2104-P or GT2103-P is selected in the GOT type setting

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface 55

56

Channel No., drivers, [RS232 Setting] Channel No.2 to No.4 Use the channel No.2 to No.4 when using the Multi-channel function. For details of the Multi-channel function, refer to the following. Page 1086 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION Drivers The displayed items for a driver differ according to the settings [Manufacturer], [Controller Type] and [I/F]. When the driver to be set is not displayed, confirm if [Manufacturer], [Controller Type] and [I/F] are correct. [Setting the communication interface] section in each chapter

Precautions

When using the multiple CPU system When using the GOT to monitor the multiple CPU system of other stations, select [MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700] for the type, regardless of the host PLC CPU type (QCPU, QnACPU, or ACPU). When other models are selected, the setting of the CPU No. becomes unavailable.

Precautions for changing model When devices that cannot be converted are included. When setting of [Manufacturer] or [Controller Type] is changed, GT Designer3 displays the device that cannot be converted (no corresponding device type, or excessive setting ranges) as [??]. In this case, set the device again.

When the changed Manufacturer or Controller Type does not correspond to the network. The network will be set to the host station.

When the Manufacturer or Controller Type is changed to [None] The GT Designer3 displays the device of the changed channel No. as [??]. In this case, set the device again. Since the channel No. is retained, the objects can be reused in other channel No. in a batch by using the [Device Bach Edit], [CH No. Batch Edit] or [Device List].

Extend I/F Setting Set the communication unit attached to the extension interface of the GOT. Not applicable to GT21 and GS21.

CH No. Set the CH No. according to the intended purpose. The number of channels differs depending on the GOT to be used. 0: Not used 1 to 4: Used for the controllers of channel numbers 1 to 4 set in controller setting (channel setting). 5 to 8: Used for the barcode function, the RFID function, and the remote personal computer operation function (Serial). A: Used for the video/RGB display function, multimedia function, external I/O function, operation panel function, video output function, report function, hard copy function (with a printer), and sound output function.

Driver Set the driver for the device to be connected. Each communication driver suitable to the channel numbers Each communication driver for connected devices

Detail Setting Set the detailed settings for the communication driver. Refer to each chapter of the equipment to be connected to the GOT.

Item Description

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface

1

1.2 Writing the Package Data onto the GOT Write the package data onto the GOT. For details on writing to GOT, refer to the following help. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Writing the Package Data onto the GOT

1. Select [Package Data] for [Write Data]. The capacity of the transfer data is displayed in [Data Size]. Check that the destination drive has the sufficient available space.

2. Select [Destination Drive].

3. When the system application or the special data is required to be added to the package data or deleted, click the [Write Option] button and configure the setting in the [Write Option] dialog.

4. Click the [GOT Write] button.

5. The package data is written to the GOT.

1.

2.

3.

4.

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.2 Writing the Package Data onto the GOT 57

58

Checking the package data writing on GOT Confirm if the package data is properly written onto the GOT by reading from GOT using GT Designer3. For reading from the GOT, refer to the following help. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

1. Set [GOT Side] as follows. Select [Project Data] or [Package Data] for [Read Data]. Select the drive where the project data or the package data is stored for [Source Drive].

2. Set [PC Side]. Set the reading destination of the project for [Destination]. To read the project data to GT Designer3, select [GT Designer3]. (When [Read Data] is [Package Data], the project data cannot be read to GT Designer3.) To read the project data as a file, click the [...] button to set the saving format and the saving destination of the file.

3. Click the [GOT Read] button.

4. The project is read.

5. Confirm that the project data is written correctly onto the GOT.

1.

2.

3.

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.2 Writing the Package Data onto the GOT

1

1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection The following shows the option devices to connect in the respective connection type. For the specifications, usage and connecting procedure on option devices, refer to the respective device manual.

Communication module Product name Model Specifications Bus connection unit GT15-QBUS For QCPU (Q mode), Motion CPU (Q series)

Bus connection (1ch) unit standard model

GT15-QBUS2 For QCPU (Q mode), Motion CPU (Q series) Bus connection (2ch) unit standard model

GT15-ABUS For A/QnACPU, Motion CPU (A series) Bus connection (1ch) unit standard model

GT15-ABUS2 For A/QnACPU, Motion CPU (A series) Bus connection (2ch) unit standard model

GT15-75QBUSL For QCPU (Q mode), Motion CPU (Q series) Bus connection (1ch) unit slim model

GT15-75QBUS2L For QCPU (Q mode), Motion CPU (Q series) Bus connection (2ch) unit slim model

GT15-75ABUSL For A/QnACPU, Motion CPU (A series) Bus connection (1ch) unit slim model

GT15-75ABUS2L For A/QnACPU, Motion CPU (A series) Bus connection (1ch) unit slim model

Serial communication unit GT15-RS2-9P RS-232 serial communication unit (D-sub 9-pin (male))

GT15-RS4-9S RS-422/485 serial communication unit (D-sub 9-pin (female))

GT15-RS4-TE RS-422/485 serial communication unit (terminal block)

MELSECNET/H communication unit GT15-J71LP23-25 Optical loop unit

GT15-J71BR13 Coaxial bus unit

MELSECNET/10 communication unit GT15-J71LP23-25 Optical loop unit (MELSECNET/H communication unit used in the MNET/10 mode)

GT15-J71BR13 Coaxial bus unit (MELSECNET/H communication unit used in the MNET/10 mode)

CC-Link IE TSN communication unit GT25-J71GN13-T2 Local station (device station)

CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit

GT15-J71GP23-SX Optical loop unit

CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit GT15-J71GF13-T2 CC-Link IE Field Network (1000BASE-T) unit

CC-Link communication unit GT15-J61BT13 Intelligent device station unit CC-LINK Ver. 2 compatible

Ethernet communication unit GT25-J71E71-100 Ethernet (100Base-TX) unit

Wireless LAN communication unit*1*2 GT25-WLAN Used for the connection to the IEEE802.11b/g/n compliant, built-in antenna, access point (master unit), station (slave unit), personal computers, tablets, and smartphones.

Compliance with Japan Radio Law*3, FCC*4, RE*6 (R&TTE*4), SRRC*5, KC*5, Radio Equipment Regulations (UKCA)*7

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection 59

60

*1 Data transfer in wireless LAN communication may not be as stable as that in cable communication. A packet loss may occur depending on the surrounding environment and the installation location. Be sure to perform a confirmation of operation before using this product.

*2 When [Operation Mode] is set to [Access Point] in [Wireless LAN Setting] of GT Designer3, up to five stations are connectable to the wireless LAN access point (base station).

*3 The product with hardware version A or later (manufactured in December 2013) complies with the regulation. The product with hardware version A can be used only in Japan. For information on how to check the hardware version, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Hardware)

*4 The product with hardware version B or later (manufactured from October 2014) complies with the regulation. The product with hardware version B or later can be used in Japan, the United States, the EU member states, Switzerland, Norway, Iceland, and Liechtenstein. For information on how to check the hardware version, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Hardware)

*5 The product with hardware version D or later (manufactured from May 2016) complies with the regulation. The product with hardware version D or later can be used in Japan, the United States, the EU member states, Switzerland, Norway, Iceland, Liechtenstein, China (excluding Hong Kong, Macao, and Taiwan), and South Korea. For information on how to check the hardware version, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Hardware)

*6 The product complies with the RE Directive from March 31, 2017. *7 The product with hardware version G or later (manufactured from October 2021) complies with the regulation.

The product with hardware version G or later can be used in Japan, the United States, the EU member states, the UK, Switzerland, Norway, Iceland, Liechtenstein, China (excluding Hong Kong, Macao, and Taiwan), and South Korea.

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection

1

Option unit

Conversion cables

Serial multi-drop connection unit

Field network adapter unit

RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter

Product name Model Specifications Multimedia unit GT27-MMR-Z For video input signal (NTSC/PAL) 1 ch, playing movie

Video input unit GT27-V4-Z For video input signal (NTSC/PAL) 4 ch

RGB input unit GT27-R2 GT27-R2-Z

For analog RGB input signal 2 ch

Video/RGB input unit GT27-V4R1-Z For video input signal (NTSC/PAL) 4 ch, for analog RGB mixed input signal 1 ch

RGB output unit GT27-ROUT GT27-ROUT-Z

For analog RGB output signal 1 ch

Digital video output unit GT27-VHOUT For digital video output, 1 channel

Sound output unit GT15-SOUT For sound output

External I/O unit GT15-DIOR For the connection to external I/O device or operation panel (Negative Common Input/Source Type Output)

GT15-DIO For the connection to external I/O device or operation panel (Positive Common Input/Sink Type Output)

Product name Model Specifications RS-485 terminal block conversion modules

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL05 RS-422/485 (Connector) RS-485 (Terminal block) Supplied connection cable dedicated for the conversion unitFA-LTBGT2R4CBL10

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL20

Product name Model Specifications Serial multi-drop connection unit GT01-RS4-M GOT multi-drop connection module

Page 1019 LASER DISPLACEMENT SENSOR MH11 CONNECTION

Product name Model Specifications Field network adapter unit GT25-FNADP The field network adapter unit can be used with the following field networks by using the Anybus

CompactCom M40 network communication module manufactured by HMS (hereinafter referred to as the communication module). Field networks: PROFIBUS DP-V1 DeviceNet How to incorporate the communication module to the field network adapter unit, and the details of the product name of the communication module, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series Field Network Adapter Unit User's Manual

Product name Model Specifications RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter

GT14-RS2T4-9P RS-232 signal (D-Sub 9-pin connector) RS-485 signal (Terminal block)

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection 61

62

Precautions when installing units on top of one another When units are installed on top of one another, the installation positions are determined by the combination of units.

How to install a communication unit and option unit For how to install a communication unit and option unit, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Hardware) When the multi-channel function is used When the multi-channel function is used, the connection type combinations are determined. For the connection type combinations, refer to the following. Page 1094 Determining the connection type and channel No. (System selection)

*1 Only one of the units can be installed on the GOT. *2 The unit requires two stages. *3 A slim model bus connection unit (GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-75ABUSL, or GT15-75ABUS2L) cannot be installed on

another unit. *4 The unit cannot be installed on a group B unit.

Product Model Number of occupied slots

Installation position

Group A *1 Video input unit GT27-V4-Z *2 2 1st stage

RGB input unit GT27-R2

GT27-R2-Z *2

Video/RGB input unit GT27-V4R1-Z *2

RGB output unit GT27-ROUT

GT27-ROUT-Z *2

Multimedia unit GT27-MMR-Z *2

Digital video output unit GT27-VHOUT

Group B *1 Bus connection unit (2 channels) *3 GT15-QBUS2 2 When a group A unit is installed: Upper stage of the unit

When no group A unit is installed: 1st stage When a group C unit is installed: Lower stage of

the unit

GT15-ABUS2

MELSECNET/H communication unit GT15-J71LP23-25

GT15-J71BR13

CC-Link IE TSN communication unit GT25-J71GN13-T2

CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit

GT15-J71GP23-SX

CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit

GT15-J71GF13-T2

CC-Link communication unit GT15-J61BT13

Group C Bus connection unit (1 channel) *3*4 GT15-QBUS 1 When a group A unit is installed: Upper stage of the unit

When a group B unit is installed: Upper stage of the unit

GT15-ABUS

Ethernet communication unit GT25-J71E71-100

Serial communication unit GT15-RS2-9P

GT15-RS4-9S

GT15-RS4-TE

Sound output unit GT15-SOUT

External I/O unit GT15-DIOR

GT15-DIO

Printer unit GT15-PRN

Field network adapter unit GT25-FNADP 1 Uppermost stage

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection

1

Example) When installing a video/RGB input unit, MELSECNET/H communication unit, and serial communication unit

Video/RGB input unit

Serial communication unit

Serial communication unit MELSECNET/H communication unit

MELSECNET/H communication unit

Video/RGB input unit

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection 63

64

1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection To connect the GOT to a device in the respective connection type, connection cables between the GOT and a device are necessary. For cables needed for each connection, refer to each chapter for connection. For the dimensions of connection cables and connector shapes, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Hardware)

GOT connector specifications The following shows the connector specifications on the GOT side. Refer to the following table when preparing connection cables by the user.

RS-232 interface The following connector or equivalent connector is used for the RS-232 interface of the GOT and the RS-232 communication unit. For the GOT side of the connection cable, use a connector and connector cover applicable to the GOT connector.

Connector specifications

*1 The terminal block (MC1.5/9-ST-3.5 or corresponding product) of the cable side is packed together with the GT2104-RTBD, GT2103- PMBDS2.

*2 The applicable solderless terminal of the terminal block is AI 0.25-6BU (AWG24) (PHOENIX CONTACT Inc.). When fabricating a connection cable, use CRIMPFOX 6 (PHOENIX CONTACT Inc.) for crimping tool.

Connector pin arrangement

GOT Connector type Connector model Manufacturer GT27, GT25, GT23, GT2107-W, GT2105-QTBDS, GT2105-QMBDS, GS21

9-pin D-sub (male) #4-40UNC inch screw thread

17LE-23090-27(D3CH)-FA DDK Ltd.

GT15-RS2-9P 9-pin D-sub (male) #4-40UNC inch screw thread

17LE-23090-27(D3CH)-FA DDK Ltd.

GT01-RS4-M JES-9P-2A3A J.S.T.MFG.CO.,LTD. (JST)

GT2104-RTBD GT2104-PMBDS2 GT2103-PMBDS2

9-pin terminal block *1*2 MC1.5/9-G-3.5BK PHOENIX CONTACT Inc

GT27, GT25, GT23, GT2107-W, GT2105-QTBDS, GT2105- QMBDS, GS21, GT15-RS2-9P, GT01-RS4-M

GT2104-RTBD, GT2104-PMBDS2, GT2103-PMBDS2

9-pin D-sub (male)

GOT main part connector see from the front

1 5

6 9

See from the back of a GOT main part

9-pin terminal block

S D

R D

E R

D R

S G

C S

R S

N C

N C

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection

1

RS-422/485 interface The following connector or equivalent connector is used for the RS-422/485 interface of the GOT and the RS-422/485 communication unit. For the GOT side of the connection cable, use a connector and connector cover applicable to the GOT connector.

Connector model

*1 The terminal block (MC1.5/5-ST-3.5 or corresponding product) of the cable side is packed together with the GT2103-PMBD. *2 The terminal block (MC1.5/9-ST-3.5 or corresponding product) of the cable side is packed together with the GT2104-RTBD, GT2103-

PMBDS, GT2103-PMBLS. *3 The applicable solderless terminal of the terminal block is AI 0.25-6BU (AWG24) (PHOENIX CONTACT Inc.).

When fabricating a connection cable, use CRIMPFOX 6 (PHOENIX CONTACT Inc.) for crimping tool.

Connector pin arrangement

GOT Connector type Connector model Manufacturer GT27, GT25, GT23, GT2107-W, GT2105-QTBDS, GT2105-QMBDS, GS21

9-pin D-Sub (female) M2.6 metric screw thread

17LE-13090-27(D3AH)-FA DDK Ltd.

GT2104-PMBD GT2103-PMBD

5-pin terminal block *1*3 MC1.5/5-G-3.5BK PHOENIX CONTACT Inc.

GT2104-RTBD GT2104-PMBDS GT2103-PMBDS GT2103-PMBLS

9-pin terminal block *2*3 MC1.5/9-G-3.5BK PHOENIX CONTACT Inc.

GT15-RS4-9S 9-pin D-Sub (female) M2.6 metric screw thread

17LE-13090-27(D3AH)-FA DDK Ltd.

GT01-RS4-M JES-9S-2A3B14 J.S.T.MFG.CO.,LTD. (JST)

GT15-RS4-TE - SL-SMT3.5/10/90F BOX Weidmller Interface GmbH & Co. KG

GT27, GT25, GT23, GT2107-W, GT2105- QTBDS, GT2105-QMBDS, GS21, GT15- RS4-9P, GT01-RS4-M

GT2104-PMBD, GT2103-PMBD GT2104-RTBD, GT2104-PMBDS, GT2103-PMBDS, GT2103-PMBLS

9-pin D-sub (female)

GOT main part connector see from the front

5 1

9 6

GOT main unit see from the back

5-pin terminal block

S D

A S

D B

R D

A R

D B

S G

GOT main unit see from the back

9-pin terminal block

S D

A S

D B

R D

A R

D B

S G

R S

B R

S A

C S

A C

S B

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection 65

66

Coaxial cable connector connection method The following describes the method for connecting the BNC connector (connector plug for coaxial cable) and the cable.

1. Remove the external sheath of the coaxial cable with dimensions as shown below.

2. Pass the nut, washer, gasket, and clamp through the coaxial cable as shown on the left and loosen the external conductor.

3. Cut the external conductor, insulting material, and internal conductor with the dimensions as shown below. Note that the external conductor should be cut to the same dimension as the tapered section of the clamp and smoothed down to the clamp.

4. Solder the contact to the internal conductor.

Cable in use A 3C-2V 15 mm

5C-2V, 5C-2V-CCY 10 mm

Cable in use B C 3C-2V 6 mm 3 mm

5C-2V, 5C-2V-CCY 7 mm 5 mm

CAUTION

Solder the coaxial cable connectors properly. Insufficient soldering may result in malfunctions.

Nut Washer Gasket

Clamp Contact

Components of the BNC connector

Plug shell

Outer sheath External conductor

Insulating material

Internal conductor

Structure of the coaxial cable

A

Cut this portion of the outer sheath

Clamp

Gasket Washer

Nut

Internal conductor Insulating material

C B Clamp and external

conductor

Solder here

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection

1

5. Insert the contact assembly shown in step 4 into the plug shell and screw the nut into the plug shell.

Precautions for soldering Note the following precautions when soldering the internal conductor and contact. Make sure that the solder does not bead up at the soldered section. Make sure there are no gaps between the connector and cable insulator or they do not cut into each other. Perform soldering quickly so the insulation material does not become deformed.

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection 67

68

Terminating resistors of GOT The following shows the terminating resistor specifications on the GOT side. When setting the terminating resistor in each connection type, refer to the following.

RS-422/485 communication unit Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch.

*1 The default setting is "Disable". For RS422/485 communication unit

Terminating resistor*1 Switch No.

1 2 100 OHM ON ON

Disable OFF OFF

SW 1O N

1 2

O N SW1

ON 1

2

Rear view of RS-422/485 communication unit.

Terminating resistor setting switch

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection

1

GT27 Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch.

*1 The default setting is "Disable". For GT2710-V

Terminating resistor*1 Switch No.

1 2 100 OHM ON ON

Disable OFF OFF

ON

1 2

Terminating resistor setting switch (inside the cover)

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection 69

70

GT25 (except GT25-W and GT2505-V) Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch.

*1 The default setting is "Disable". For GT2510-V

GT25-W Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor selector. For GT2510-WX

Terminating resistor*1 Switch No.

1 2 100 OHM ON ON

Disable OFF OFF

ON

1 2

Terminating resistor setting switch (inside the cover)

Terminating resistor selector switch (inside the cover)

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection

1

GT2505-V Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor selector.

GT23 Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch.

*1 The default setting is "Disable". For GT2310-V

Terminating resistor*1 Switch No.

1 2 100 OHM ON ON

Disable OFF OFF

Terminating resistor selector switch

ON

1 2

Terminating resistor setting switch (inside the cover)

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection 71

72

GT21 Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor selector. For GT2103-PMBD

GS21-W-N Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor selector. For GS2110-WTBD-N

Position of the terminating resistor selector switch The position of the terminating resistor selector switch depends on the GOT type. For the details, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Hardware) Terminating resistor of GS21-W The terminating resistor of GS21-W is fixed to 330 . For the details, refer to the following. GOT SIMPLE Series User's Manual

USB

Terminating resistor selector switch

Terminating resistor selector switch

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection

1

Setting the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor Set the 2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch according to the connection type.

Enable the 5V power supply Make sure to validate "Enable the 5V power supply" in the [RS232 Setting] to operate the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor. Page 54 I/F communication setting When validating the function using the utility function of the GOT main unit, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)

Setting the 2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch

RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter For details on the RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter, refer to the following manual. GT14-RS2T4-9P RS-232/485 Signal Conversion Adapter User's Manual

Setting item Set value Switch No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 2-wire/4-wire 2-wire (1Pair) ON ON - - - OFF

4-wire (2Pair) OFF OFF - - - OFF

Terminating resistor 110 - - ON OFF OFF OFF

OPEN - - OFF OFF OFF OFF

330 - - OFF ON ON OFF

2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch

1 O

2 N

3 4 5 6

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection 73

74

1.5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment Verify the GOT recognizes controllers on [Communication Settings] of the Utility. Channel number of communication interface, communication drivers allocation status Communication unit installation status For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)

1. After powering up the GOT, touch [GOT basic set] [Controller] from the Utility.

2. The [Communication Settings] appears.

3. Verify that the communication driver name to be used is displayed in the communication interface box to be used.

4. When the communication driver name is not displayed normally, carry out the following procedure again. Page 35 Setting the Communication Interface

1.

2. 3.

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment

1

Utility How to display Utility (at default)

Utility call When setting [Pressing time] to other than 0 second on the setting screen of the utility call key, press and hold the utility call key until the buzzer sounds. For the setting of the utility call key, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication setting] after writing [Controller Setting] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective.

Utility call key 1-point press on GOT screen upper-left corner Utility display

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment 75

76

1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring Check on the GOT

Check for errors occurring on the GOT Presetting the system alarm to project data allows you to identify errors occurred on the GOT, PLC CPU, servo amplifier and communications. For details on the operation method of the GOT Utility screen, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)

Alarm popup display With the alarm popup display function, alarms are displayed as a popup display regardless of whether an alarm display object is placed on the screen or not (regardless of the display screen). Since comments can be flown from right to left, even a long comment can be displayed all. For details of the alarm popup display, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Error code Communication Channel No.

Error message Time of occurrence (Displayed only for errors)

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring

1

Perform an I/O check Whether the PLC can communicate with the GOT or not can be checked by the I/O check function. If this check ends successfully, it means correct communication interface settings and proper cable connection. Display the I/O check screen by Main Menu. Display the I/O check screen by [Maintenance] [I/O check]. For details on the I/O check, refer to the following manual: GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)

1. Touch [CPU] on the I/O check screen. Touching [CPU] executes the communication check with the connected PLC.

2. When the communication screen ends successfully, the screen on the left is displayed.

1.

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 77

78

Communication monitoring function The communication monitoring is a function that checks whether the PLC can communicate with the GOT. If this check ends successfully, it means correct communication interface settings and proper cable connection. Display the communication monitoring function screen by [Main Menu] [Comm. Setting] [Comm. Monitor]. For details on the communication monitoring function, refer to the following manual: GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) (Operation of communication monitoring function screen)

Confirming the communication status with network unit by GOT When the GOT with any of the following units mounted is connected, the communication status of the communication unit can be checked on the GOT.

The communication status of the communication unit can be checked in the [Network Status Display] in utility of the GOT. For details on the operation method of the GOT Utility screen, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) For details on the [Network Status Display], refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Monitor)

Communication unit Connection type MELSECNET/H communication unit GT15-J71LP23-25

GT15-J71BR13 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 connection

CC-Link IE TSN communication unit GT25-J71GN13-T2 CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit GT15-J71GP23-SX CC-Link IE Controller Network connection

CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit GT15-J71GF13-T2 CC-Link IE Field Network connection

CC-Link communication unit GT15-J61BT13 CC-Link connection (Intelligent device station)

Comm. SettingMain Menu

Comm. Monitor

Touch [Comm. Setting].

Touch [Comm. Monitor].

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring

1

Confirming the communication state on the GOT side (For Ethernet connection)

Confirming the communication state on Windows, GT Designer3 When using the Windows Command Prompt Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows. At normal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.18 Reply from 192.168.3.18: bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=64 At abnormal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.18 Request timed out.

When using the [Test] of GT Designer3 Select [Communication] [Communication settings] from the menu to display [TEST].

1. Set the [PC side I/F] to the [Ethernet].

2. Specify the [GOT IP Address] of the [Communication Configuration] and click the [Test] button.

3. Check if GT Designer3 has been connected to the GOT.

At abnormal communication At abnormal communication, check the followings and execute the Ping command or [Test] again. Mounting condition of Ethernet communication unit Cable connecting condition Confirmation of [Communication Settings] IP address of GOT specified by Ping command

2.

1.

3.

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 79

80

Confirming the communication state on the GOT [PING Test] can be confirmed by the Utility screen of the GOT. For details on the operation method of the GOT Utility screen, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring

1

Confirming the communication state to each station (Station monitoring function) The station monitoring function detects the faults (communication timeout) of the stations monitored by the GOT. When detecting the abnormal state, it allocates the data for the faulty station to the GOT special register (GS).

No. of faulty stations Ethernet connection (Except for Ethernet multiple connection) Total No. of the faulty CPU is stored.

Ethernet multiple connection Total No. of the faulty connected equipment is stored.

When monitoring GS230 on Numerical Display When monitoring GS230 on Numerical Display, check [mask processing] with data operation tab as the following. For the data operation, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Numerical Display (Data Operation tab)

Device b15 to b8 b7 to b0 GS230 (00H fixed) No. of faulty stations

Channel Device b15 to b8 b7 to b0 Ch1 GS280 (00H fixed) No. of faulty stations

Ch2 GS300 (00H fixed) No. of faulty stations

Ch3 GS320 (00H fixed) No. of faulty stations

Ch4 GS340 (00H fixed) No. of faulty stations

Set [mask processing] to the upper eight bits (b8 to b15) of GS230 on Numerical Display.

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 81

82

Faulty station information The bit corresponding to the faulty station is set. (0: Normal, 1: Abnormal) The bit is reset after the fault is recovered.

Ethernet connection

The following shows the Ethernet setting numbers corresponding to each devices in the multi-channel Ethernet connection.

Device Ethernet setting No.

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 GS231 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

GS232 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17

GS233 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33

GS234 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49

GS235 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65

GS236 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81

GS237 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97

GS238 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113

Device Ethernet setting No.

Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 GS281 GS301 GS321 GS341 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

GS282 GS302 GS322 GS342 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17

GS283 GS303 GS323 GS343 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33

GS284 GS304 GS324 GS344 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49

GS285 GS305 GS325 GS345 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65

GS286 GS306 GS326 GS346 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81

GS287 GS307 GS327 GS347 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97

GS288 GS308 GS328 GS348 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113

GS231 bit 0 GS231 bit 1 GS231 bit 2 GS231 bit 3

Ethernet setting No.

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring

1

CC-Link IE TSN connection

Temperature controller (AZBIL temperature controller (DMC50)) connection

Other connection types The corresponding devices differ depending on the communication driver to be used. Communication drivers that monitor the host station only

The host station uses bit 0. Ch1: GS281.b0 Ch2: GS301.b0 Ch3: GS321.b0 Ch4: GS341.b0

Device Station number

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 GS1281 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

GS1282 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

GS1283 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32

GS1284 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48

GS1285 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64

GS1286 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80

GS1287 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 96

GS1288 - - - - - - - 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 112

Device Station number-Sub Station

Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 GS281 GS301 GS321 GS341 1-15 1-14 1-13 1-12 1-11 1-10 1-9 1-8 1-7 1-6 1-5 1-4 1-3 1-2 1-1 1-0

GS282 GS302 GS322 GS342 2-15 2-14 2-13 2-12 2-11 2-10 2-9 2-8 2-7 2-6 2-5 2-4 2-3 2-2 2-1 2-0

GS283 GS303 GS323 GS343 3-15 3-14 3-13 3-12 3-11 3-10 3-9 3-8 3-7 3-6 3-5 3-4 3-3 3-2 3-1 3-0

GS284 GS304 GS324 GS344 4-15 4-14 4-13 4-12 4-11 4-10 4-9 4-8 4-7 4-6 4-5 4-4 4-3 4-2 4-1 4-0

GS285 GS305 GS325 GS345 5-15 5-14 5-13 5-12 5-11 5-10 5-9 5-8 5-7 5-6 5-5 5-4 5-3 5-2 5-1 5-0

GS286 GS306 GS326 GS346 6-15 6-14 6-13 6-12 6-11 6-10 6-9 6-8 6-7 6-6 6-5 6-4 6-3 6-2 6-1 6-0

GS287 GS307 GS327 GS347 7-15 7-14 7-13 7-12 7-11 7-10 7-9 7-8 7-7 7-6 7-5 7-4 7-3 7-2 7-1 7-0

GS288 GS308 GS328 GS348 8-15 8-14 8-13 8-12 8-11 8-10 8-9 8-8 8-7 8-6 8-5 8-4 8-3 8-2 8-1 8-0

Communication driver list Bus Q Bus A/QnA Serial(MELSEC)

AJ71QC24, MELDAS C6* AJ71C24/UC24 CC-Link(G4)

MELSEC-FX MELSEC-WS OMRON SYSMAC

YASKAWA GL YASKAWA CP9200 (H) YASKAWA CP9300MS (MC compatible)

YASKAWA MP2000/MP900/CP9200SH AB Control/CompactLogix SHARP JW

TOSHIBA PROSEC T/V HITACHI IES HIDIC H HITACHI IES HIDIC H(Protocol2)

PANASONIC MEWNET-FP PANASONIC MEWTOCOL-7 SIEMENS S7-200

YOKOGAWA FA500/FA-M3/STARDOM Serial(KEYENCE) HITACHI S10mini/S10V

FUJI MICREX-SX SPH SHIBAURA MACHINE TCmini SICK Flexi Soft

IAI X-SEL PROFIBUS DP DeviceNet

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 83

84

Communication drivers that monitor other stations as well as the host station

The following shows the corresponding devices.

*1 When CC-Link IE controller network connection is not used. *2 When CC-Link IE field network connection is not used.

For details on the GS Device, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Network No., station No. notification The network No. and station No. of the GOT in Ethernet connection are stored at GOT startup. If connected by other than Ethernet, 0 is stored.

When using the station monitoring function in the CC-Link IE Field Network connection When a submaster station is on the network, use the CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit (GT15-J71GF13-T2) with the software version C or later. The software version is the 10th digit of the serial number described on the rating plate of the unit.

Communication driver list CC-Link IE Controller Network CC-Link IE Field Network MEI Nexgenie

AB SLC500 AB 1:N connection AB MicroLogix AB MicroLogix(Extended)

SIEMENS S7-300/400 JTEKT TOYOPUC-PC FUJI MICREX-F

GE(SNP-X) KOYO KOSTAC/DL LS Industrial Systems MASTER-K

Hirata HNC IAI robocylinder Panasonic MINAS A4

Panasonic MINAS A5 Muratec MPC MELSERVO-J4,J3,J2S/M,JE

FREQROL 500/700/800,SENSORLESS SERVO FREQROL 800 FREQROL(Batch monitor)

OMRON THERMAC/INPANEL NEO OMRON Digital Temperature Controller AZBIL SDC/DMC

AZBIL DMC50 RKC SR Mini HG (MODBUS) FUJI Temperature Controller/Digital Controller

YOKOGAWA GREEN/UT100/UT2000/ UTAdvanced

SHINKO TECHNOS CONTROLLER CHINO MODBUS device

MODBUS/RTU Master

Device Station number

Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 GS281 GS301 GS321 GS341 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0*1

GS282 GS302 GS322 GS342 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

GS283 GS303 GS323 GS343 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32

GS284 GS304 GS324 GS344 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48

GS285 GS305 GS325 GS345 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64

GS286 GS306 GS326 GS346 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80

GS287 GS307 GS327 GS347 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 96

GS288 GS308 GS328 GS348 127 *1*2

126 *1*2

125 *1*2

124 *1*2

123 *1*2

122 *1*2

121 *1*2

120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 112

Device Description

CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 GS376 GS378 GS380 GS382 Network No. (1 to 239)

GS377 GS379 GS381 GS383 Station No. (1 to 64)

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring

1

Detectable faulty stations using the station monitoring function (CC-Link IE TSN connection) Detectable faulty stations depend on the communication mode of the cyclic transmission.

When the communication mode is multicast mode Data link faulty stations are all detected from the data link status of each station. For details of the data link status, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE TSN User's Manual (Application)

When the communication mode is unicast mode Only the errors in the master station are detected. Stations other than the master station are always recognized as faulty stations.

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 85

86

Check on GX Developer

Check if the PLC CPU recognizes the GOT (For bus connection) (QCPU (Q mode) only) Using the [System monitor] of GX Developer, check if the PLC CPU recognizes the GOT or not. For the GX Developer operation method, refer to the following manual. GX Developer Version Operating Manual

Check the Module Name, I/O Address and Implementation Position. (The display example is based on GX Developer Version 8)

Startup procedure: GX Developer [Diagnostics] [System monitor]

No error displayed

at all times

Not displayed

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring

1

Checking the wiring state (For optical loop system only) Check if the optical fiber cable is connected correctly in [Loop test] of GX Developer. For the GX Developer operation method, refer to the following manual. Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network)

Check the [Receive direction error station] (The display example on GX Developer Version 8) Startup procedure: GX Developer [Diagnostics] [MELSECNET (II)/10/H diagnostics]

Checking if the GOT is performed the data link correctly For MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 network system Check if the GOT is performed the data link correctly in [Other station information]. For the GX Developer operation method, refer to the following manual. Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) Check [Communication status of each station] and [Data-Link status of each station] (The display example on GX

Developer Version 8) Startup procedure: GX Developer [Diagnostics] [MELSECNET (II)/10/H diagnostics]

Loop test

Other station info.

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 87

88

For CC-Link IE Controller Network system Use [CC IE Control diagnostics] of GX Developer to check if the GOT is correctly performed the data link. For the GX Developer operation method, refer to the following manual. CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual Check the [Select station network device status display] (The display example on GX Developer Version 8) Startup procedure: GX Developer [Diagnostics] [CC IE Control diagnostics] [CC IE Control Network Diagnostics]

For CC-Link system Use [Monitoring other station] of the GX Developer to check if the GOT is correctly performed the data link. For the GX Developer operation method, refer to the following manual. CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual QJ61BT11N Check the [Status] (The display example on GX Developer Version 8) Startup procedure: GX Developer [Diagnostics] [CC-Link / CC-Link LT diagnostics] Monitoring other station

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring

1

Check on GX Works2

For CC-Link IE Controller Network system Use [CC IE Field diagnostics] of GX Works2 to check if the GOT is correctly performed the data link. For the GX Works2 operation method, refer to the following manual. MELSEC-Q CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local Module User's Manual Startup procedure: GX Works2 [diagnostics] [CC IE Field diagnostics]

Check on the PLC

Checking the wiring state of the optical fiber cable (For CC-Link IE Controller Network only) Check if the fiber-optic cable is connected correctly to all the modules in the CC-Link IE Controller Network. Perform the line test from the control station of the CC-Link IE Controller Network to check the wiring state of the fiber-optic cable. For the line testing method, refer to the following manual. CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual

Checking the wiring state of the CC-Link dedicated cable (For CC-Link system only) Check if the CC-Link dedicated cable is connected correctly to all the modules in the CC-Link system. Perform the line test from the master station of the CC-Link System to check the wiring state of the CC-Link dedicated cable. For the line testing method, refer to the following manuals. CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual QJ61BT11N CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual AJ61QBT11, A1SJ61QBT11 CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual AJ61BT11, A1SJ61BT11

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 89

90

MEMO

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring

PART 2 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC PLC CONNECTIONS

2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION

5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL)

6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION

7 BUS CONNECTION

8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

9 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION

10 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION

11 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION

12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION)

13 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4)

91

92

2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Page 92 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems Page 105 Access Range for Monitoring when Using Ethernet Connection Page 107 CC-Link System Access Range for Monitoring Page 109 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on the Data Link System Page 110 Access Range for Monitoring when Connecting FXCPU Page 111 Connection to Remote I/O Station Page 114 Connection to the Head Module

2.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems

This section shows the access range for monitoring the stations on the MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10, CC-Link IE TSN, CC-Link IE Controller Network, and CC-Link IE Field Network.

Bus connection When connecting to multiple CPU system The GOT can monitor the control station and all the normal stations on the network.

The GOT can monitor the control station and all the normal stations on other networks. (For monitoring stations on other networks, be sure to set the routing parameter) When the Universal model QCPU is used as a relay station, the GOT can monitor stations with the station No.65 or later in the CC-Link IE controller network.

When connecting to the multiple CPU system, the GOT can monitor CPU No.1 to No.4.

GOT

Normal station

Normal station

Normal station

Control station

*1

GOT

Normal station

Normal station

Normal station

Control station

Normal station

Control station

Normal station

*1

GOT

Normal station

Normal station

Normal station

Control station

Control station

Normal station

Normal station

2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 2.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems

2

Devices of other stations (other than devices B and W that are allocated by the network parameter) may not allow monitoring depending on their PLC CPU.

Page 98 Monitor accessible range of other stations and setting method of monitor devices (Examples 1 to 2) *1 The control station and normal station correspond to the master station and local station in the CC-Link IE field network respectively.

When connecting to QCPU (Q mode)/QnACPU/AnUCPU The GOT can monitor the control station and all the normal stations on the network.

The GOT can monitor the control station and all the normal stations on other networks. (For monitoring stations on other networks, be sure to set the routing parameter) When the Universal model QCPU is used as a relay station, the GOT can monitor stations with the station No.65 or later in the CC-Link IE controller network.

When connected to a relay station and the data link system is included, the master station and local stations can be monitored.

When connected to a relay station, it is not necessary to designate the data link parameter [Effective unit number for accessing other stations] for the PLC CPU of the connected station. (Even if designated, the parameter is ignored)

Devices of other stations (other than devices B and W that are allocated by the network parameter) may not allow monitoring depending on their PLC CPU.

Page 98 Monitor accessible range of other stations and setting method of monitor devices (Examples 1 to 2) *1 The control station and normal station correspond to the master station and local station in the CC-Link IE field network respectively.

GOT

Normal station

Normal station

Normal station

Control station

*1

*1

GOT

Normal station

Normal station

Normal station

Normal station

Control station

Normal station

Control station

GOT

Normal station

Normal station

M station

L station

Control station

Normal station

Control station

L station

2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 2.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems 93

94

When connecting to AnACPU/AnNCPU The GOT can monitor the control station on the network. When the PLC CPU on the control station is the QCPU (Q mode) or QnACPU, the GOT cannot monitor devices other than B and W assigned for the network parameter.

The GOT cannot monitor normal stations on the network. The GOT cannot monitor any stations on the other networks.

GOT

Normal station

Normal station

Control station

Normal station

GOT

Normal station

Normal station

Control station

Normal station

Control station

Normal station

Normal station

2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 2.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems

2

Direct CPU connection (serial)/serial communication connection When connecting to multiple CPU system Corresponding to the access range described in Page 92 When connecting to multiple CPU system. RCPU cannot be monitored.

When connecting to RCPU For the serial communication connection, refer to the following. Page 96 MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection, CC-Link IE TSN connection, CC-Link IE Controller Network connection, CC-Link IE Field Network connection The GOT cannot access a CPU via MELSECNET (II), computer link, or CC-Link network. When monitoring an RCPU, if a PLC CPU other than the RCPU is used in the route from the connected station to the

RCPU to be monitored, the RCPU cannot be accessed.

When connecting to QCPU (Q mode)/QnACPU Corresponding to the access range described in Page 93 When connecting to QCPU (Q mode)/QnACPU/AnUCPU. RCPU cannot be monitored.

When connecting to QCPU (A mode)/AnUCPU The GOT can monitor the control station and all the normal stations on the network. For monitoring devices (other than B and W assigned for the network parameter) of other stations, the GOT cannot monitor the devices of the PLC CPU that is the QCPU (Q mode) or QnACPU.

If connected to a relay station, use data link parameter [Effective unit number for accessing other stations] to designate the unit number that is connected to the network to be monitored.

RCPU cannot be monitored.

When connecting to AnACPU/AnNCPU Corresponding to the access range described in Page 94 When connecting to AnACPU/AnNCPU. RCPU cannot be monitored.

GOT

Normal station

Normal station

Normal station

Control station

*1

*1

GOT

Normal station

Normal station

M station

L station

Control station

Normal station

Control station

L station

2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 2.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems 95

96

When connecting to Motion CPU (Q series), CNC C70, or robot controller (Q series) using the direct CPU connection (serial)

Monitor the motion CPU (Q series), CNC (CNC C70), or robot controller (CRnQ-700) via the following QCPUs in the multiple CPU system.

*1 The control station and normal station correspond to the master station and local station in the CC-Link IE field network respectively. RCPU cannot be monitored.

When connecting to LCPU Refer to the following. Page 96 MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection, CC-Link IE TSN connection, CC-Link IE Controller Network connection, CC-Link IE Field Network connection RCPU cannot be monitored.

CC-Link connection (intelligent device station), CC-Link connection (via G4) Only the station connected to the GOT can be monitored. Page 98 Monitor accessible range of other stations and setting method of monitor devices Example 6: When using CC- Link connection (intelligent device station) /CC-Link connection (via G4) When the station connected to the GOT is in the multiple CPU system, the GOT can monitor CPU No.1 to No.4. The GOT cannot monitor other stations. The GOT cannot monitor any stations on the other networks.

MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection, CC-Link IE TSN connection, CC-Link IE Controller Network connection, CC-Link IE Field Network connection

Precautions for cyclic transmission Devices that can be accessed by cyclic transmission differ according to connection type.

The GOT is regarded as a normal station and monitors the control station and all normal stations on the network. When the monitoring target is a PLC CPU within a multiple CPU system, the GOT can monitor CPU No. 1 to CPU No. 4 by specifying CPU No. When monitoring the CPU of the multiple CPU system via CC-Link IE TSN, the CPU may not be monitored depending on its firmware version. For the firmware version of the CPU that can be monitored, refer to the following. Page 616 Precautions When monitoring a cyclic device of other stations via CC-Link IE TSN, the following conditions must be satisfied. GX Works3: Set [Communication Mode] of the master station to [Multicast]. CC-Link IE TSN communication unit (GT25J71GN13-T2): Firmware version 02 or later CC-Link IE TSN master/local module (RJ71GN11-T2): Firmware version 04 or later

Controller Relay CPU Motion CPU (Q Series) Q172HCPU, Q173HCPU QCPU (Q mode)

Q172DCPU, Q173DCPU QnUCPU

CNC C70 Q173NCCPU

Robot controller (Q series) CRnQ-700 (Q172DRCPU), CR800-Q (Q172DSRCPU)

Connection type Device that can be accessed

WS ,BS ,WL ,BL ,W ,BH/TENCESLEM

WS ,BS ,WL ,BL ,W ,B01/TENCESLEM

WS ,BS ,WL ,BL ,rW ,wW ,YR ,XRNST EI kniL-CC

WS ,BS ,WL ,BL ,W ,BkrowteN rellortnoC EI kniL-CC

WS ,BS ,rW ,wW ,YR ,XR ,Y ,XkrowteN dleiF EI kniL-CC

2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 2.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems

2

When monitoring other networks, a CPU on another Ethernet, MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10, CC-Link IE TSN, CC- Link IE Controller Network, or CC-Link IE Field Network is accessible via the PLC CPU. (When monitoring other networks via the R motion, only a CPU on another Ethernet network is accessible.)

However, the GOT cannot monitor the CNC C70 on other networks. On the Ethernet network, only QCPU (Q mode) and QnACPU can be accessed. When monitoring other networks in MELSECNET/10 connection, install the MELSECNET/H communication unit on the

GOT. To monitor other networks, setting of routing parameters is required. For routing parameter setting, refer to the following manuals. For the routing parameter setting for the GOT, refer to the following. Page 535 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Page 589 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION Page 619 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION Page 659 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION For the routing parameter setting for the PLC CPU, refer to the following. MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 connection Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) CC-Link IE TSN connection MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application) CC-Link IE Controller Network connection MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application) MELSEC-Q CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual CC-Link IE Field Network connection MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application) MELSEC-Q CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local Module User's Manual If devices of other stations (other than devices B and W that are allocated by the network parameter) are monitored,

monitoring may not be available depending on the PLC CPU of the network system to be monitored. Page 98 Monitor accessible range of other stations and setting method of monitor devices Example 5: When using MELSECNET/10 connection In the MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10, CC-Link IE TSN, CC-Link IE Controller Network, or CC-Link IE Field Network

connection, the data link status can be checked by monitoring the device status of link special relay (SB) and link special register (SW) of the communication unit (host) mounted to the GOT.

For the details, refer to the following manual. Reference manual of the relevant network

When using the redundant system (QCPU) as a relay station For monitoring other networks by using the redundant system (QCPU) as a relay station, configure the MELSEC redundant settings. When path switching occurs due to cable disconnection When path switching occurs due to cable disconnection, the station of the control system can be monitored through a tracking cable, but the station of other networks cannot be monitored through the redundant system.

Monitoring devices of other stations on the network If devices of other stations on the network system are monitored, the display speed will be significantly reduced. Therefore, monitor the link relay (B) and link register (W) that are allocated by the network parameter.

Monitoring devices of other networks (Bus connection, direct CPU connection (serial), serial communication connection) Be sure to designate the routing parameter to the PLC CPU of the connected station. If another network is monitored, the display speed of object etc. will be significantly reduced.

2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 2.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems 97

98

Monitor accessible range of other stations and setting method of monitor devices Example 1: When using bus connection

Monitor accessible range of devices (other than B or W) of other stations or other networks Specify the accessing network No. or station as shown in the following table.

To monitor B or W of the connected station (host station) assigned with a network parameter, specify the host station.

To monitor another station (other than B or W) or another network, specify the station (network No. and station No.).

Monitoring link device B or W For monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by the link parameter, use the host device number even when designating devices allocated to another station. Otherwise, the display speed will be reduced.

Station connected to GOT

Station to be accessed

Network No.1 Network No.2

AnU (1-1) QnA (1-2) AnA (1-3) AnU (1-4) QnA (2-1) AnU (2-2) AnN (2-3) AnU (2-4) AnU (1-1)

Host Other (1-3) Other (1-4) Other (2-2) Other (2-4)

QnA (1-2)

Other (1-1) Host Other (1-4) Other (2-1) Other (2-2) Other (2-4)

AnA (1-3)

Other (0-0) Host

AnU (1-4) (2-2)

Other (1-1) Host Host Other (2-4)

QnA (2-1)

Other (1-1) Other (1-2) Other (1-4) Host Other (2-2) Other (2-3) Other (2-4)

AnN (2-3)

Host

AnU (2-4)

Other (1-1) Other (1-4) Other (2-2) Host

How to read the table Upper line: Accessibility

: Accessible : Not accessible

Lower line: Network settings Host Other (Network No. - Station number)

Control station Control station

AnU (1-1)

QnA (2-1)

AnN (2-3)

AnU (1-4) (2-2)

AnA (1-3)

Network No.1 Network No.2QnA (1-2) (2-4)

AnU

2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 2.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems

2

Example 2: When using bus connection

Monitor accessible range of devices (other than B or W) of other stations or other networks Specify the accessing network No. or station as shown in the following table.

To monitor B or W of the connected station (host station) assigned with a network parameter, specify the host station.

Control station

Network No.2Network No.1

Data link system

Control station

QnA (1-1)

AnA (1-2)

QnA (L1)

AnA (L2)

AnU (2-1)

AnU (2-3)

AnU (2-4)QnA

(1-3) (2-2) (M)

2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 2.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems 99

10

To monitor another station (other than B or W) or another network, specify the station (network No. and station No.).

*1 When monitoring the data link system, designate the network No. as 0.

Monitoring link device B or W For monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by the link parameter, use the host device number even when designating devices allocated to another station. Otherwise, the display speed will be reduced.

Station connected to GOT

Station to be accessed

Network No.1 Network No.2 Data link system

QnA (1-1) AnA (1-2) QnA (1-3) AnU (2-1) QnA (2-2) AnU (2-3) AnU (2-4) QnA (M) QnA (L1) AnA (L2) QnA (1-1)

Host Other (1-2) Other (1-3) Other (2-1) Other (2-2) Other (2-3) Other (2-4) Other (1-3) or Other (2-2)

AnA (1-2)

Host

QnA (1-3) (2-2) (M)

Other (1-1) Host Other (2-1) Host Other (2-3) Other (2-4) Host Other (0-2)*1

AnU (2-1)

Host Other (2-3) Other (2-4)

AnU (2-3)

Other (2-1) Host Other (2-4)

AnU (2-4)

Other (2-1) Other (2-3) Host

QnA (L1)

Host

AnA (L2)

Host

How to read the table Upper line: Accessibility

: Accessible : Not accessible

Lower line: Network settings Host Other (Network No. - Station number)

0 2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 2.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems

2

Example 3: When using direct CPU connection (serial) or serial communication connection

Monitor accessible range of devices (other than B or W) of other stations or other networks Specify the accessing network No. or station as shown in the following table.

To monitor B or W of the connected station (host station) assigned with a network parameter, specify the host station.

To monitor another station (other than B or W) or another network, specify the station (network No. and station No.).

Monitoring link device B or W For monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by the link parameter, use the host device number even when designating devices allocated to another station. Otherwise, the display speed will be reduced.

Station connected to GOT

Station to be accessed

Network No.1 Network No.2

AnU (1-1) Q(Q mode) (1-2)

AnA (1-3) AnU (1-4) QnA (2-1) AnU (2-2) AnN (2-3) AnU (2-4)

AnU (1-1)

Host Other (1-3) Other (1-4) Other (2-2)

Q (Q mode) (1-2)

Other (1-1) Host Other (1-4) Other (2-1) Other (2-2) Other (2-4)

AnA (1-3)

Other (0-0) Host

AnU (1-4) (2-2)

Other (1-1) Host Host

QnA (2-1)

Other (1-1) Other (1-2) Other (1-4) Host Other (2-2) Other (2-3) Other (2-4)

AnN (2-3)

Host

AnU (2-4)

Other (2-2) Host

How to read the table Upper line: Accessibility

: Accessible : Not accessible

Lower line: Network settings Host Other (Network No. - Station number)

Control station Control station

Network No.1 Network No.2

AnU (1-1)

Q(Q mode) (1-2)

AnA (1-3)

AnN (2-3)

AnU (2-4)

QnA (2-1)

AnU (1-4) (2-2)

2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 2.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems 101

10

Example 4: When using direct CPU connection (serial) or serial communication connection

Monitor accessible range of devices (other than B or W) of other stations or other networks Specify the accessing network No. or station as shown in the following table.

To monitor B or W of the connected station (host station) assigned with a network parameter, specify the host station.

To monitor another station (other than B or W) or another network, specify the station (network No. and station No.).

*1 When monitoring the data link system, designate the network No. as 0.

Station connected to GOT

Station to be accessed

Network No.1 Network No.2 Data link system

QnA (1-1) AnA (1-2) QnA (1-3) AnU (2-1) QnA (2-2) AnU (2-3) AnU (2-4) QnA (M) QnA (L1) AnA (L2) Q (Q mode) (1- 1)

Host Other (1-2) Other (1-3) Other (2-1) Other (2-2) Other (2-3) Other (2-4) Other (1-3) or Other (2-2)

AnA (1-2)

Host

QnA (1-3) (2-2) (M)

Other (1-1) Host Other (2-1) Host Other (2-3) Other (2-4) Host *1 Other (0-2)

AnU (2-1)

Host Other (2-3) Other (2-4)

AnU (2-3)

Other (2-1) Host Other (2-4)

AnU (2-4)

Other (2-1) Other (2-3) Host

QnA (L1)

Host

AnA (L2)

Host

How to read the table Upper line: Accessibility

: Accessible : Not accessible

Lower line: Network settings Host Other (Network No. - Station number)

Control station

AnU (2-4)QnA

(1-3) (2-2) (M)

Network No.2

AnU (2-1)

Network No.1

AnA (1-2)

QnA (L1)

AnA (L2)

Data link system

Control station

Q(Q mode) (1-1)

AnU (2-3)

2 2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 2.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems

2

Monitoring link device B or W For monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by the link parameter, use the host device number even when designating devices allocated to another station. Otherwise, the display speed will be reduced.

Example 5: When using MELSECNET/10 connection

Monitor access range for other station devices (other than B and W)

: Accessible : Not accessible Designating network No. and station number for setting monitor device

Monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by network parameter NW No.: 1, Station number: Host

For monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by the link parameter, use the local device number if designating devices allocated to another station. Otherwise, the display speed will be reduced.

Monitoring other stations (other than B and W)

Station connected to GOT

Station to be accessed

Network No.1 Network No.2

QnA (1-1)

Q (Q mode) (1-2)

GOT (1-3)

AnU (1-4)

Q (Q mode) (2-1)

QnA (2-2)

AnN (2-3)

AnU (2-4)

GOT (1-3)

Station connected to GOT Station to be accessed

QnA (1-1)

Q (Q mode) (1-2)

GOT (1-3)

AnU (1-4)

GOT (1-3) 1, Other (1) 1, Other (2) 1, Other (4)

QnA (1-1)

AnU (1-4) (2-4)

GOT (1-3)

Q (Q mode) Network No. 1 Network No. 2 (1-2)

Q (Q mode) (2-1)

QnA (2-2)

AnN (2-3)

How to read the table 1, Other (2)

NW No. Station number

2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 2.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems 103

10

Example 6: When using CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) /CC-Link connection (via G4)

: Accessible : Not accessible

Station connected to GOT Station to be accessed

QnA (1-1)

Q (Q mode) (1-2)

AnA (1-3)

AnN (1-4)

QnA (1-1)

Q(Q mode) (1-2)

AnA (1-3)

AnN (1-4)

Network module (1-2)

CC-Link Master module (0 station)

Network System

CC-Link System

Q(Q mode) (1-2)

AnA (1-3)

QnA (1-1)

AnN (1-4) GOTGOT

GOT

GOT

Image of CC-Link Connection

4 2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 2.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems

2

2.2 Access Range for Monitoring when Using Ethernet Connection

Access range MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC PLC The GOT can monitor the PLC via the Ethernet module set in [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] on GT Designer3. The GOT can access CPUs on another Ethernet network, MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10, CC-Link IE Controller Network, or CC-Link IE Field Network via an RCPU, R motion (Ver.03 or later), QCPU, QnACPU, or LCPU. (Monitoring other networks via an R motion (earlier than Ver.03) is available only by Ethernet.) However, the GOT cannot monitor the CNC C70 on other networks. (The GOT cannot monitor the AnNCPU on the CC-Link IE Controller Network, MELSECNET/H, and MELSECNET/10 networks) When monitoring the RCPU on CC-Link IE TSN, it can be accessed only when all stations from the connected station to the station to be monitored are RCPUs. For MELSEC iQ-F series, the GOT can access CPUs on other networks (CC-Link IE TSN and CC-Link IE Field Network) via the PLC CPUs. To monitor CPUs on the MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10, CC-Link IE TSN, CC-Link IE Controller Network, and CC-Link IE Field Network, set the routing parameter. For the routing parameter setting, refer to the following manuals. Routing parameter setting of the GOT Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION Routing parameter setting for accessing CPUs on the MELSECNET/H network system, or MELSECNET/10 network

system Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) Routing parameter setting for accessing CPUs on the CC-Link IE Controller Network CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual Routing parameter setting for accessing CPUs on the CC-Link IE Field Network MELSEC-Q CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local Module User's Manual CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet Adapter Module User's Manual Routing parameter settings for accessing CPUs on CC-Link IE TSN MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE TSN User's Manual (Application) Monitoring via the MELSECNET (II) or MELSECNET/B network cannot be performed.

GOT

Relay station

Connected stationEthernet

Network 1 (Ethernet)

Network 2

Relay station

Network 3 (CC-Link IE Field Network)MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10,

CC-Link IE Controller Network

Relay station

Network 4 (CC-Link IE TSN)

2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 2.2 Access Range for Monitoring when Using Ethernet Connection 105

10

Host in the Ethernet connection For the MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10, or CC-Link connection, the GOT is handled as the host station. For the Ethernet connection, the station (Ethernet module) set as the host in [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 is handled as the host station. When using the redundant system as a relay station For monitoring other networks by using the redundant system as a relay station, configure the MELSEC redundant settings. When path switching occurs due to cable disconnection When path switching occurs due to cable disconnection, the station of the control system can be monitored through a tracking cable, but the station of other networks cannot be monitored through the redundant system. When monitoring the RCPU on a different network Use one of the following paths for monitoring. Connection via an RCPU Ethernet connection between the GOT and built-in Ethernet port QCPU, and Ethernet, CC-Link IE Controller Network, or CC-Link IE Field Network connection between the GOT and QCPU and the RCPU to be monitored

Various settings For the Ethernet setting by GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION

6 2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 2.2 Access Range for Monitoring when Using Ethernet Connection

2

2.3 CC-Link System Access Range for Monitoring

When using bus connection/direct CPU connection (serial)/serial communication connection Only connected stations can be monitored.

When using CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) Access range The master station and local station can be monitored. : Can be monitored, : Cannot be monitored

*1 Monitoring is available only when the CC-Link communication module is the GT15-J61BT13. *2 The MELSEC iQ-F series (FX5U, FX5UC, FX5UJ) and MELSEC-FX (FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC) do not support the transient

transmission. All devices RX, RY, RWw and RWr that are allocated to the master station by the CC-Link parameter setting can be monitored. When the monitor target is the multi-PLC system, CPU No. 1 to No. 4 can be monitored. The device range of RX, RY, RWw, RWr to be allocated to the GOT differs according to the setting of the number of CC-Link communication units (one station/four station) occupied. For details on the number of CC-Link stations occupied, refer to the following manual . User's manual of the CC-Link master unit to be connected

Setting device name and device number Monitoring devices RX, RY, RWw and RWr that are allocated to the master station by CC-Link parameter setting Use the following device names. For devices RX, RY, RWw and RWr, designate the addresses allocated by station number setting. In the case of CC-Link Ver.2 (Device names to be refreshed automatically are indicated as X, Y, and D.)

In the case of CC-Link Ver.1 (Device names to be refreshed automatically are indicated as X, Y, and D.)

Monitoring PLC CPU devices of other stations Set the device name and device No. Page 1367 Settable Device Range

Monitor target Monitoring by cyclic transmission Monitoring by transient transmission *2

Master station (Remote network Ver.2 mode)

Local station Station No.1 (Ver.1 compatible)

Local station Station No.6 (Ver.2 compatible) *1

Device name on PLC CPU Automatic refresh

Device name on master station Link scan

GT Designer3 settings

Device name Set device range Input X Remote input RX X X0 to X1FFF

Output Y Remote output RY Y Y0 to Y1FFF

Register (write area) D Remote register (write area) RWw Ww Ww0 to Ww7FF

Register (read area) D Remote register (read area) RWr Wr Wr0 to Wr7FF

Device name on PLC CPU Automatic refresh

Device name on master station Link scan

GT Designer3 settings

Device name Set device range Input X Remote input RX X X0 to X7FF

Output Y Remote output RY Y Y0 to Y7FF

Register (write area) D Remote register (write area) RWw Ww Ww0 to WwFF

Register (read area) D Remote register (read area) RWr Wr Wr0 to WrFF

2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 2.3 CC-Link System Access Range for Monitoring 107

10

Setting NW No. and station number When monitoring devices RX, RY, RWw and RWr that are allocated to the master station by CC-Link parameter setting NW No.: 0, PLC station number: Local When monitoring PLC CPU devices of another station NW No. 0, PLC station number: Other (Station number: n) (n: Station number of another station to be monitored (0: Master station, 1-64: Local station))

For monitoring devices RX, RY, RWw and RWr that are allocated by CC-Link parameter, use the local device even if designating devices allocated to another station. Otherwise, the display speed will be reduced.

When using CC-Link connection (via G4) (Q series only) Access range GT27 can monitor the master station and local stations.

Setting NW No. and station number When monitoring master station NW No.: 0, PLC station number: Host/other (station number: 0) When monitoring local station NW No.: 0, PLC station number: Other (station number: 1 to 64)

Setting device name and device number Set the device name and device No. Page 1367 Settable Device Range

Monitoring overview The following two methods are available for monitoring by the GOT with CC-Link communication unit.

*1 This program is not required if the CC-Link parameter setting sequence program and GOT communication sequence program satisfy the following conditions. Use a QCPU (Q mode) or QnACPU whose number given in the DATE field of the rating plate is "9707B" or later as the PLC CPU of the master station. Use GX Developer or SW2-GPPW and make CC-Link parameter setting and batch refresh device setting in the CC-Link setting on the package. For details of the connection method, refer to the following manual . User's manual of the CC-Link master unit to be connected

*2 For whether the data can be sent to/received from the CC-Link Ver. 2 compatible station by transient transmission and cyclic transmission, refer to the following. Page 107 When using CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)

In transient transmission, connection of several (five or more as a guideline) intelligent device stations (GOTs and intelligent device units) reduces the data communication speed. To raise the data communication speed, increase the CC-Link system, for example, and do not connect five or more intelligent device stations to a single CC-Link system.

Monitoring method Monitoring by transient transmission*2 Monitoring by cyclic transmission*2

Contents Devices of the PLC CPU on the CC-Link system master and local station are specified and monitored.

All remote inputs/outputs and remote registers assigned to the Master station by CC-Link parameter setting are specified and monitored.

Advantage The CC-Link parameter setting sequence program is required. However, the GOT communication sequence program is not needed.*1

The data communication processing speed is high.

Disadvantage The data communication processing speed is lower than that of cyclic transmission.

Writing from the GOT (read command from the master station) can be performed only to remote outputs and remote registers assigned to the GOT of the master station and to the GOT internal registers.

GOT communication sequence program is required.*1

8 2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 2.3 CC-Link System Access Range for Monitoring

2

2.4 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on the Data Link System

The following shows the access range for monitoring the stations on the MELSECNET/B, (II) data link system.

Bus connection, direct CPU connection (serial), computer link connection When connecting to the master station Local stations can be monitored. When the PLC CPU of the local station is QnACPU, devices other than B and W that are allocated by the link parameter cannot be monitored.

When connecting to the local station The master station can be monitored. However, when the PLC CPU of the local station is QnACPU, devices other than B and W that are allocated by the link parameter cannot be monitored. Other local stations cannot be monitored.

When connecting to the master station on the third layer The master station on the second layer and local stations on the third layer can be monitored. However, when the PLC CPU of the local station is QnACPU, devices other than B and W that are allocated by the link parameter cannot be monitored. Local stations on the second layer cannot be monitored.

Monitoring devices of other stations If devices of other stations on the data link system are monitored, the display speed will be significantly reduced. Therefore monitor the link relay (B) and link register (W) that are allocated by the link parameter.

L3

M

L1

L2

GOT

L1

L2

M

L3

GOT

GOT

L3

M

L1

L2 m

2

1 3

2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 2.4 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on the Data Link System 109

11

Setting method of monitor device The following example describes the method of setting the network No. and the station numbers when setting monitor devices .

Monitoring the connected station (host station) and B and W allocated by the link parameter Specify the host station.

Monitoring devices of other stations Network No.: 0, Station number: Refer to the following table. Setting of the station No.

Monitoring link device B or W For monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by the link parameter, use the host device number even when designating devices allocated to another station. Otherwise, the display speed will be reduced.

2.5 Access Range for Monitoring when Connecting FXCPU

The GOT can access only the connected CPU when the direct CPU connection (serial) is used. (The GOT cannot monitor other stations.) The access range that can be monitored for the Ethernet connection is the host and others. The access range that can be monitored for the multi-drop communication is only the CPU to which the serial multi-drop connection unit (GT01-RS4-M) is connected directly.

Station connected to GOT Station to be accessed

M L1 L2 m

L3 1 2 3

M Host Other 1 Other 2 Other 3

L1 Other 0 Host

L2 m

Other 0 Host Other 1 Other 2 Other 3

L3 Other 0 Host

1 Other 0 Host

2 Other 0 Host

3 Other 0 Host

L3

M

L1

GOT

L2 m

2

1 3

0 2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 2.5 Access Range for Monitoring when Connecting FXCPU

2

2.6 Connection to Remote I/O Station

When connected to the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system, the GOT can monitor the PLC CPU of the master station. When connecting the GOT to the remote I/O station, use the following connection methods.

Connection to remote I/O station of MELSECNET/B, (II) or /10 The GOT cannot be connected to the remote I/O station on the MELSECNET/B, (II) data link system and MELSECNET/10 network system. Connect the GOT to the remote I/O station on the MELSECNET/H network system.

Monitor target

Network No.1 Station No.0 (master station)

Q J71LP

21-25

Q33B

MELSECNET/H remote I/O Network

Network No.1 Station No.1 (remote I/O station)

Q J72LP

25-25

Q J71C

24N

Q33B

Q J71E

71-100 E

m pty

P ow

er supply m

odule

E m

pty

E m

pty

P ow

er supply m

odule P

LC C

P U

Hub

GOT

(3) Ethernet connection

GOT

(2) Serial communication

GOT

(1) Direct CPU connection (serial)

connection

2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 2.6 Connection to Remote I/O Station 111

11

Direct CPU connection (serial) The network units (QJ72LP25-25, QJ72LP25G, QP72BR15) of the remote I/O station are handled as PLC CPU. Connect the GOT to the RS-232 interface of the network unit. For cables required for connection with the network module and other details, refer to the following. Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) Specify a type including MELSEC-Q (including multiple), or MELSEC-QnU for the controller type on GT Designer3. Then,

specify [[NW No.] (Network No. of the remote I/O network) to 1, and specify [Station No.] (Master station) to 0.] as the monitoring target in the network setting of the device setting dialog box. (GT16, GT15 only)

The GOT monitors stations on the MELSECNET/H network with the transient transmission. Therefore, a longer time-lag occurs for displaying objects compared with directly monitoring the PLC CPU. For displaying objects with a shorter time-lag, execute the cyclic transmission so that the GOT can monitor link devices B and W of the host station set in the MELSECNET/H network. For settings required for the PLC CPU, refer to the following manual. Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (Remote I/Q network) To monitor other networks, set the routing parameter to the PLC CPU as necessary. For routing parameter settings of the

PLC CPU, refer to the following manual. Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network)

Serial communication connection Connect the GOT to the serial communication module (QJ71C24, QJ71C24-R2, QJ71C24N, QJ71C24N-R2, QJ71C24N-

R4) or modem interface module (QJ71CMO) mounted on the remote I/O station. For the cables required for connection with the serial communication module or modem interface module and other details, refer to the following. Page 435 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION Specify a type including MELSEC-Q (including multiple), or MELSEC-QnU for the controller type on GT Designer3. Then,

specify [[NW No.] (Network No. of the remote I/O network) to 1, and specify [Station No.] (Master station) to 0.] as the monitoring target in the network setting of the device setting dialog box. (GT16, GT15 only)

The GOT monitors stations on the MELSECNET/H network with the transient transmission. Therefore, a longer time-lag occurs for displaying objects compared with directly monitoring the PLC CPU. For displaying objects with a shorter time-lag, execute the cyclic transmission so that the GOT can monitor link devices B and W of the host station set in the MELSECNET/H network. For settings required for the PLC CPU, refer to the following manual. Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (Remote I/Q network) To monitor other networks, set the routing parameter to the PLC CPU as necessary. For routing parameter settings of the

PLC CPU, refer to the following manual. Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network)

2 2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 2.6 Connection to Remote I/O Station

2

Ethernet connection Connect the GOT to the Ethernet module (QJ71E71-100, QJ71E71-B5, QJ71E71-B2, QJ71E71) mounted on the remote I/

O station. For details of cables and others required for connecting the GOT to the Ethernet module, refer to the following. Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION Specify a type including MELSEC-Q (including multiple), or MELSEC-QnU for the controller type on GT Designer3. Then,

specify [[NW No.] (Network No. of the remote I/O network) to 1, and specify [Station No.] (Master station) to 0.] as the monitoring target in the network setting of the device setting dialog box. (GT16, GT15 only)

The GOT monitors stations on the MELSECNET/H network with the transient transmission.Therefore, a longer time-lag occurs for displaying objects compared with directly monitoring the PLC CPU. For displaying objects with a shorter time-lag, execute the cyclic transmission so that the GOT can monitor link devices B and W of the remote I/O station. For settings required for the PLC CPU, refer to the following manual. Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (Remote I/Q network) To monitor other networks, set the routing parameter to the GOT and PLC CPU as necessary. For routing parameter

settings of the GOT, refer to the following manual. Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION For routing parameter settings of the PLC CPU, refer to the following manual. Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network)

Restrictions on connection to remote I/O station The GOT does not allow the clock of the master station to be set in the clock setting of the utility function. The master station clock will not change even if the clock setting is made. Use GX Developer or a similar software to set the PLC CPU clock of the master station.

2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 2.6 Connection to Remote I/O Station 113

11

2.7 Connection to the Head Module

When connected to the head module of the CC-Link IE Field Network, the GOT can monitor the PLC CPUs of the master station and local stations. The serial communication connection and Ethernet connection are available between the GOT and the head module. The following shows a system configuration example.

Serial communication connection Connect the GOT to the serial communication module (RJ71C24, RJ71C24-R2, RJ71C24-R4, LJ71C24, LJ71C24-R2)

mounted on the head module. For cables required for connection with the serial communication module and other details, refer to the following. Page 435 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION Specify a GOT type which includes MELSEC-QnU in the controller type on GT Designer3. Then, specify [Network No. 1

(Network No. of CC-Link IE Field Network), Station No. 0 (Master station)] as the monitoring target in the network setting of the device setting dialog box. (GT16, GT15, GT14 only)

In this case, the GOT monitoring is performed by transient transmission of the CC-Link IE Field Network. Therefore, a longer time-lag occurs for displaying objects compared with directly monitoring the PLC CPU. For displaying objects with a shorter time-lag, execute the cyclic transmission so that the GOT can monitor link devices B and W of the host station set in the CC-Link IE Field Network. For settings required for the PLC CPU, refer to the following manual. MELSEC-L CC-Link IE Field Network Head Module User's Manual MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE Field Network Remote Head Module User's Manual (Application) To monitor other networks, set the routing parameter to the PLC CPU as necessary. For routing parameter setting of the

PLC CPU, refer to the following manual. MELSEC-L CC-Link IE Field Network Head Module User's Manual MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE Field Network Remote Head Module User's Manual (Application)

Monitor target Network No. 1, Station No. 0

Q J71G

F11-T2

E m

pty

P ow

er supply m

odule

E m

pty

C LP

C P

U

Q33B

CC-Link IE Field Network

LJ72G F15-T2

LJ71C 24

P ow

er supply m

odule

LX 40C

6

LY 10R

2

R J72G

F15-T2

R J71C

24

P ow

er supply m

odule

R J71E

N 71

E m

pty

Network No. 1, Station No. 1

Network No. 1, Station No. 2

GOT GOT GOT

Ethernet connectionSerial communication connection Serial communication connection

Hub

4 2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 2.7 Connection to the Head Module

2

Ethernet connection Connect the GOT to the Ethernet module (RJ71EN71) mounted on the head module. For cables required for connection with the serial communication module and other details, refer to the following. Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION Specify a GOT type which includes MELSEC-QnU in the controller type on GT Designer3. Then, specify [Network No. 1

(Network No. of CC-Link IE Field Network), Station No. 0 (Master station)] as the monitoring target in the network setting of the device setting dialog box. (GT27, GT25 only)

In this case, the GOT monitoring is performed by transient transmission of the CC-Link IE Field Network. Therefore, a longer time-lag occurs for displaying objects compared with directly monitoring the PLC CPU. For displaying objects with a shorter time-lag, execute the cyclic transmission so that the GOT can monitor link devices B and W of the host station set in the CC-Link IE Field Network. For settings required for the PLC CPU, refer to the following manual. MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE Field Network Remote Head Module User's Manual (Application) To monitor other networks, set the routing parameter to the GOT and PLC CPU as necessary. For routing parameter

settings of the GOT, refer to the following manual. Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION For routing parameter settings of the PLC CPU, refer to the following manual. MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE Field Network Remote Head Module User's Manual (Application)

Restrictions on connection to head module The GOT does not allow the clock of the master station to be set in the clock setting of the utility function. The master station clock will not change even if the clock setting is made. Use GX Works or similar software to set the PLC CPU clock of the master station.

2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 2.7 Connection to the Head Module 115

11

MEMO

6 2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 2.7 Connection to the Head Module

3

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM Page 117 MELSEC iQ-R Series Page 175 MELSEC Q Series Page 215 MELSEC Redundant Setting

3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series This section explains the restrictions on the connection methods and other information applicable when the RCPU redundant system is monitored by the GOT.

1) Process CPU 2) Redundant function module 3) Tracking cable 4) CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module 5) Remote head module

3) 4)4)

Remote I/O station

GOT

5)

Standby system (system B)

Control system (system A)

CC-Link IE Field Network

When an error occurs in System A, System B switches from standby system to control system.

1) Process CPU 2) Redundant function module 3) Tracking cable 4) CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module 5) Remote head module

2)1)2)1)

2)1)2)1)

3) 4)4)

Remote I/O station

5)

Control system (system B)

Standby system (system A)

CC-Link IE Field Network

GOT

The GOT monitors the control system PLC CPU.

The GOT monitors the PLC CPU of the new control system after system switching.

Ethernet

Ethernet (RCPU redundant system)

(RCPU redundant system)

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series 117

11

Module configuration when using the SIL2 Process CPU (RnPSFCPU) To configure the redundant system of the SIL2 Process CPU (RnPSFCPU), mount the SIL2 function module (R6PSFM) and redundant function module (R6RFM) next to the SIL2 Process CPU on the base unit. When mounting these modules on the base unit, mount them in the order of the SIL2 Process CPU, SIL2 function module, and redundant function module.

In a redundant system, the monitoring can be performed with the monitoring target specified as the control system or the standby system on the GOT. By specifying the monitoring target PLC CPU as the control system of the redundant system, the monitoring target is automatically changed to the PLC CPU in the control system when system switching occurs. To enable this automatic changing of the monitoring target at the GOT, settings are required in the GT Designer3. Page 215 MELSEC Redundant Setting The following connection methods are available for the RCPU redundant system. Page 119 Connection to built-in Ethernet port CPU Page 125 Connection to Ethernet module Page 132 Connection to CC-Link IE Controller Network Page 137 Connection to CC-Link IE Field Network Page 142 Connection to Remote I/O Station in CC-Link IE Field Network Page 165 Connection to CC-Link (intelligent device station) Page 168 When connecting via the serial communication unit

1) SIL2 Process CPU (RnPSFCPU) 2) SIL2 function module (R6PSFM) 3) Redundant function module (R6RFM)

2) 3)1)

8 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series

3

Connection to built-in Ethernet port CPU Page 119 One-to-one connection of GOT and redundant system Page 121 1:n connection with redundant system Page 123 For mixed connection of redundant system and Non-redundant system

One-to-one connection of GOT and redundant system System configuration example The following connection configuration examples are explained.

Connection method Connect the built-in Ethernet port CPU to the GOT. Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION

PLC Side Setting Control system (system A) PLC setting (GX Works3) Built-in Ethernet port

Item Set value IP address setting 192.168.3.1

Subnet Mask -

Default Gateway -

Online Program Change Permission/Protection Setting (Use default value)

Communication Data Code

Open Method Setting

Target Device Connection Configuration Setting -

GOT

1) Process CPU 2) Redundant function module 3) Tracking cable 4) CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module

2) 4)2) 4) 1) 1)

3)

N/W No.: 1(virtual) PC No.: 1(virtual) IP address: 192.168.3.1 Port No.: 5006

N/W No.: 1(virtual) PC No.: 2(virtual) IP address: 192.168.3.2 Port No.: 5006

N/W No.: 1(virtual) PC No.: 3(virtual) IP address: 192.168.3.3 Port No.: 5001

Control system (system A)

Standby system (system B)

Ethernet

(Redundant system: Pair No.1)

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series 119

12

Standby system (system B) PLC setting (GX Works3) Redundant Setting

[Control system IP address availability] setting Set [Control system IP address availability] to [Not use] (default). If set to [Use], the GOT will not follow the system switching.

GOT Side Settings Set GT Designer3 as follows.

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs, CPU (PLC station No.: 2) takes over the control of the Ethernet network system as the control system. The GOT automatically starts monitoring accroding to the specified system.

Item Set value System B IP Address 192.168.3.2

Control system IP address availability Not Use

Setting item Contents of setting Model Controller Type MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D

Device setting (Network setting) Host Host (The control system is monitored.)

Other NW No.: Network No. of Ethernet

Station No.: Station number of the control system

Control system/ standby system

The system (control system/standby system) of the the monitor target can be speified. Only when checking [Enable Redundant Function] in the following [MELSEC Redundant System Setting], [Control System/Standby System] can be set.

Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION

MELSEC Redundant Setting

Page 215 MELSEC Redundant Setting

0 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series

3

1:n connection with redundant system System configuration example The following connection configuration examples are explained.

Connection method Connect the Ethernet network system to the GOT. Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION

PLC Side Setting Page 119 PLC Side Setting

GOT

1) Process CPU 2) Redundant function module 3) Tracking cable 4) CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module

N/W No.: 1(virtual) PC No.: 1(virtual) IP address: 192.168.3.1 Port No.: 5006

N/W No.: 1(virtual) PC No.: 2(virtual) IP address: 192.168.3.2 Port No.: 5006

4)2)1)1) 2) 4)

2) 4)2) 4) 1) 1)

3)

3)

N/W No.: 1(virtual) PC No.: 3(virtual) IP address: 192.168.3.3 Port No.: 5006

N/W No.: 1(virtual) PC No.: 4(virtual) IP address: 192.168.3.4 Port No.: 5006

N/W No.: 1(virtual) PC No.: 5(virtual) IP address: 192.168.3.5 Port No.: 5001

Control system (system A) Standby system (system B)

Control system (system A)

Standby system (system B)

Ethernet

(Pair No.2)

(Pair No.1)

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series 121

12

GOT Side Settings Set GT Designer3 as follows.

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system Redundant system-1 When the system switching occurs, CPU (PLC station No.: 2) takes over the control of the Ethernet network system as the control system. The GOT automatically starts monitoring accroding to the specified system. Redundant system-2 When the system switching occurs, CPU (PLC station No.: 4) takes over the control of the Ethernet network system as the control system. The GOT automatically starts monitoring accroding to the specified system.

Setting item Contents of setting Model Controller Type MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D

Device setting (Network setting) Host Host (The control system is monitored.)

Other NW No.: 1

Station No.: Station number of the control system

Control system/ standby system

The system (control system/standby system) of the the monitor target can be speified. Only when checking [Enable Redundant Function] in the following [MELSEC Redundant System Setting], [Control System/Standby System] can be set.

Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION

MELSEC Redundant Setting

Page 215 MELSEC Redundant Setting

2 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series

3

For mixed connection of redundant system and Non-redundant system System configuration example The following connection configuration examples are explained.

Connection method Connect the Ethernet network system to the GOT. Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION

PLC Side Setting Page 119 PLC Side Setting

GOT

1) Process CPU 2) Redundant function module 3) Tracking cable 4) CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module 5) RCPU 6) I/O module

N/W No.: 1(virtual) PC No.: 1(virtual) IP address: 192.168.3.1 Port No.: 5006

N/W No.: 1(virtual) PC No.: 2(virtual) IP address: 192.168.3.2 Port No.: 5006

4)2)1)1) 2) 4)

2) 4)2) 4) 1) 1)

3)

3)N/W No.: 1(virtual) PC No.: 3(virtual) IP address: 192.168.3.3 Port No.: 5006

N/W No.: 1(virtual) PC No.: 4(virtual) IP address: 192.168.3.4 Port No.: 5006

N/W No.: 1(virtual) PC No.: 6(virtual) IP address: 192.168.3.6 Port No.: 5001

Control system (system A) Standby system (system B)

Control system (system A)

Standby system (system B)

Ethernet

N/W No.: 1(virtual) PC No.: 5(virtual) IP address: 192.168.3.5 Port No.: 5006

5) 6)

(Non-redundant system )

(Redundant system-2: Pair No.2)

(Redundant system-1: Pair No.1)

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series 123

12

GOT Side Settings Set GT Designer3 as follows.

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system Page 122 Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system

Setting item Contents of setting Model Controller Type MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D

Device setting (Network setting) Host Host (The control system is monitored.)

Other NW No.: 1

Station No.: Station number of the control system

Control system/ standby system

The system (control system/standby system) of the the monitor target can be speified. Only when checking [Enable Redundant Function] in the following [MELSEC Redundant System Setting], [Control System/Standby System] can be set.

Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION

MELSEC Redundant Setting

Page 215 MELSEC Redundant Setting

4 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series

3

Connection to Ethernet module Page 125 One-to-one connection of GOT and redundant system Page 128 1:n connection of GOT and redundant system Page 130 For mixed connection of redundant system and Non-redundant system

One-to-one connection of GOT and redundant system System configuration example The following connection configuration examples are explained.

Connection method Connect the built-in Ethernet port CPU to the GOT. Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION

GOT

1) Process CPU 2) Redundant function module 3) Tracking cable 4) Ethernet module 5) CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module

2) 5)2) 5)1) 1)

3)

N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 1 IP address: 192.168.3.1 Port No.: 5001

N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 2 IP address: 192.168.3.2 Port No.: 5001

N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 3 IP address: 192.168.3.3 Port No.: 5001

Control system (system A)

Standby system (system B)

Ethernet

4)4)

(Redundant system: Pair No.1)

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series 125

12

PLC Side Setting (GX Works3) Control system (system A) PLC setting Module parameter setting of Ethernet module

Standby system (system B) PLC setting (GX Works3) Redundant Setting

[Control system IP address availability] setting Set [Control system IP address availability] to [Not use] (default). If set to [Use], the GOT will not follow the system switching.

Item Set value IP address setting 192.168.3.1

Subnet Mask -

Default Gateway -

Setting Method of Network No. and Station No. Do Not Use IP Address

Network No. 1

Station No. 1

Transient Transmission Group No. (Use default value)

Online Program Change Permission/Protection Setting

Communication Data Code

Open Method Setting

Target Device Connection Configuration Setting -

Item Set value System B IP Address 192.168.3.2

Control system IP address availability 2

B system module operation mode Online mode

Control system IP address availability Not Use

6 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series

3

GOT Side Settings Set GT Designer3 as follows.

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs, CPU (PLC station No.: 2) takes over the control of the Ethernet network system as the control system. The GOT automatically starts monitoring accroding to the specified system.

Setting item Contents of setting Model Controller Type MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D

Device setting (Network setting) Host Host (The control system is monitored.)

Other NW No.: Network No. of Ethernet

Station No.: Station number of the control system

Control system/ standby system

The system (control system/standby system) of the the monitor target can be speified. Only when checking [Enable Redundant Function] in the following [MELSEC Redundant System Setting], [Control System/Standby System] can be set.

Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION

MELSEC Redundant Setting

Page 215 MELSEC Redundant Setting

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series 127

12

1:n connection of GOT and redundant system System configuration example The following connection configuration examples are explained.

Connection method Connect the Ethernet network system to the GOT. Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION

PLC Side Setting (GX Works3) Page 126 PLC Side Setting (GX Works3)

GOT

1) Process CPU 2) Redundant function module 3) Tracking cable 4) Ethernet module 5) CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module

N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 1 IP address: 192.168.3.1 Port No.: 5001

N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 2 IP address: 192.168.3.2 Port No.: 5001

5)2)1)1) 2) 5)

2) 5)2) 5)1) 1)

3)

3)

N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 3 IP address: 192.168.3.3 Port No.: 5001

N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 4 IP address: 192.168.3.4 Port No.: 5001

N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 5 IP address: 192.168.3.5 Port No.: 5001

Control system (system A) Standby system (system B)

Control system (system A)

Standby system (system B)

Ethernet

4) 4)

4) 4)

(Redundant system-2: Pair No.2)

(Redundant system-1: Pair No.1)

8 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series

3

GOT Side Settings Set GT Designer3 as follows.

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system Redundant system-1 When the system switching occurs, CPU (PLC station No.: 2) takes over the control of the Ethernet network system as the control system. The GOT automatically starts monitoring accroding to the specified system. Redundant system-2 When the system switching occurs, CPU (PLC station No.: 4) takes over the control of the Ethernet network system as the control system. The GOT automatically starts monitoring accroding to the specified system.

Setting item Contents of setting Model Controller Type MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D

Device setting (Network setting) Host Host (The control system is monitored.)

Other NW No.: 1

Station No.: Station number of the control system

Control system/ standby system

The system (control system/standby system) of the the monitor target can be speified. Only when checking [Enable Redundant Function] in the following [MELSEC Redundant System Setting], [Control System/Standby System] can be set.

Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION

MELSEC Redundant Setting

Page 215 MELSEC Redundant Setting

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series 129

13

For mixed connection of redundant system and Non-redundant system System configuration example The following connection configuration examples are explained.

Connection method Connect the Ethernet network system to the GOT. Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION

PLC Side Setting Page 126 PLC Side Setting (GX Works3)

GOT

1) Process CPU 2) Redundant function module 3) Tracking cable 4) Ethernet module 5) CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module 6) RCPU 7) I/O module

N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 1 IP address: 192.168.3.1 Port No.: 5001

N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 2 IP address: 192.168.3.2 Port No.: 5001

5)2)1)1) 2) 5)

2) 5)2) 5)1) 1)

3)

3)N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 3 IP address: 192.168.3.3 Port No.: 5001

N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 4 IP address: 192.168.3.4 Port No.: 5001

N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 6 IP address: 192.168.3.6 Port No.: 5001

Control system (system A) Standby system (system B)

Control system (system A)

Standby system (system B)

Ethernet

N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 5 IP address: 192.168.3.5 Port No.: 5001

4)

7)6)

4)

4) 4)

4)

(Non-redundant system)

(Redundant system-2: Pair No.2)

(Redundant system-1: Pair No.1)

0 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series

3

GOT Side Settings Set GT Designer3 as follows.

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system Page 127 Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system

Setting item Contents of setting Model Controller Type MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D

Device setting (Network setting) Host Host (The control system is monitored.)

Other NW No.: 1

Station No.: Station number of the control system

Control system/ standby system

The system (control system/standby system) of the the monitor target can be speified. Only when checking [Enable Redundant Function] in the following [MELSEC Redundant System Setting], [Control System/Standby System] can be set.

Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION

MELSEC Redundant Setting

Page 215 MELSEC Redundant Setting

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series 131

13

Connection to CC-Link IE Controller Network Page 132 One-to-one connection of GOT and redundant system Page 135 1:n connection of GOT and redundant system Page 136 For mixed connection of redundant system and Non-redundant system

One-to-one connection of GOT and redundant system System configuration example The following connection configuration examples are explained.

Connection method Connect the CC-Link IE Controller Network system to the GOT. Page 619 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION

GOT

1) Process CPU 2) Redundant function module 3) Tracking cable 4) CC-Link IE Controller Network module 5) CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module

2) 5)2) 5)1) 1)

3)

N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 1

N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 2

N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 3

Control system (system A) Standby system (system B)

4) 4)

Optical cable (Redundant system: Pair No.1)

2 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series

3

PLC Side Setting (GX Works3) Control system (system A) PLC setting Module parameter

Network range assignment

Control system (system A) PLC setting Redundant Setting

Item Set value Station type Control station (fixed)

Network No. 1

Station number setting 1

Network range assignment Refer to hereinafter

Item Set value Pairing To pair

Item Set value B system module operation mode Online mode

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series 133

13

GOT Side Settings Set GT Designer3 as follows.

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs, CPU (PLC station No.: 2) takes over the control of the Ethernet network system as the control system. The GOT automatically starts monitoring accroding to the specified system.

Setting item Contents of setting Model Controller Type MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D

Device setting (Network setting) Host -

Other NW No.: 1

Station No.: Station number of the control system

Control system/ standby system

The system (control system/standby system) of the the monitor target can be speified. Only when checking [Enable Redundant Function] in the following [MELSEC Redundant System Setting], [Control System/Standby System] can be set.

MELSEC Redundant Setting

Page 215 MELSEC Redundant Setting

4 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series

3

1:n connection of GOT and redundant system System configuration example The following connection configuration examples are explained.

Connection method Connect the Ethernet network system to the GOT. Page 619 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION

PLC Side Setting Page 133 PLC Side Setting (GX Works3)

GOT Side Settings Set GT Designer3 as follows.

Setting item Contents of setting Model Controller Type MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D

Device setting (Network setting) Host -

Other NW No.: 1

Station No.: Station number of the control system

Control system/ standby system

The system (control system/standby system) of the the monitor target can be speified. Only when checking [Enable Redundant Function] in the following [MELSEC Redundant System Setting], [Control System/Standby System] can be set.

MELSEC Redundant Setting

Page 215 MELSEC Redundant Setting

GOT

1) Process CPU 2) Redundant function module 3) Tracking cable 4) CC-Link IE Controller Network module 5) CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module

N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 1

N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 2

5)2)1)1) 2) 5)

2) 5)2) 5)1) 1)

3)

3)

N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 3

N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 4

N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 5

Control system (system A)

Standby system (system B)

Control system (system A)

Standby system (system B)

4) 4)

4) 4)

Optical cable

(Redundant system-1: Pair No.1)

(Redundant system-2: Pair No.2)

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series 135

13

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system Redundant system-1 When the system switching occurs, CPU (PLC station No.: 2) takes over the control of the Ethernet network system as the control system. The GOT automatically starts monitoring accroding to the specified system. Redundant system-2 When the system switching occurs, CPU (PLC station No.: 4) takes over the control of the Ethernet network system as the control system. The GOT automatically starts monitoring accroding to the specified system.

For mixed connection of redundant system and Non-redundant system System configuration example The following connection configuration examples are explained.

Connection method Connect the CC-Link IE Controller Network system to the GOT. Page 619 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION

PLC Side Setting Page 133 PLC Side Setting (GX Works3)

GOT Side Settings Page 134 GOT Side Settings

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system Page 136 Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system

GOT

1) Process CPU 2) Redundant function module 3) Tracking cable 4) CC-Link IE Controller Network module 5) CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module 6) RCPU 7) I/O module

N/W No.:1 PC No.:1

N/W No.:1 PC No.:2

5)2)1)1) 2) 5)

2) 5)2) 5)1) 1)

3)

3)

N/W No.:1 PC No.:3

N/W No.:1 PC No.:4

N/W No.:1 PC No.:6

Control system (system A)

Standby system (system B)

Control system (system A)

Standby system (system B)

4) 4)

4) 4)

Optical cable

N/W No.:1 PC No.:5

6) 4) 7)

(Non-redundant system )

(Redundant system-1: Pair No.1)

(Redundant system-2: Pair No.2)

6 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series

3

Connection to CC-Link IE Field Network Page 137 One-to-one connection of GOT and redundant system Page 140 1:n connection of GOT and redundant system Page 141 For mixed connection of redundant system and Non-redundant system

One-to-one connection of GOT and redundant system System configuration example The following connection configuration examples are explained.

Connection method Connect the CC-Link IE Field Network system to the GOT. Page 659 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION

GOT

1) Process CPU 2) Redundant function module 3) Tracking cable 4) CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module (GOT connection) 5) CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module (Remote I/O station connection)

2) 5)2) 5)1) 1)

3)

N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 0

N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 1

N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 2

Control system (system A)

Standby system (system B)

4) 4)

Ethernet cable (Redundant system: Pair No.1)

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series 137

13

PLC Side Setting (GX Works3) Control system (system A) PLC setting Module parameter

Network range setting

Control system (system A) PLC setting Redundant Setting

Item Set value Station type Master station (fixed)

Network No. 1

Station number setting Parameter

Station No. 0 (fixed)

Parameter setting Engineering tool

Network Configuration Settings Refer to next page

Item Set value Sub master station No. 1

Item Set value B system module operation mode Online mode

8 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series

3

GOT Side Settings Set GT Designer3 as follows.

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs, CPU (PLC station No.: 1) takes over the control of the Ethernet network system as the control system. The GOT automatically starts monitoring accroding to the specified system.

Setting item Contents of setting Model Controller Type MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D

Device setting (Network setting) Host -

Other NW No.: 1

Station No.: Station number of the control system

Control system/ standby system

The system (control system/standby system) of the the monitor target can be speified. Only when checking [Enable Redundant Function] in the following [MELSEC Redundant System Setting], [Control System/Standby System] can be set.

MELSEC Redundant Setting

Page 215 MELSEC Redundant Setting

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series 139

14

1:n connection of GOT and redundant system System configuration example The following connection configuration examples are explained.

Connection method Connect the CC-Link IE Field Network system to the GOT. Page 659 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION

PLC Side Setting (GX Works3) Page 138 PLC Side Setting (GX Works3)

GOT Side Settings Set GT Designer3 as follows.

Setting item Contents of setting Model Controller Type MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D

Device setting (Network setting) Host -

Other NW No.: 1

Station No.: Station number of the control system

Control system/ standby system

The system (control system/standby system) of the the monitor target can be speified. Only when checking [Enable Redundant Function] in the following [MELSEC Redundant System Setting], [Control System/Standby System] can be set.

MELSEC Redundant Setting

Page 215 MELSEC Redundant Setting

GOT

1) Process CPU 2) Redundant function module 3) Tracking cable 4) CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module (GOT connection) 5) CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module (Remote I/O station connection)

N/W No.:1 PC No.:0

N/W No.:1 PC No.:1

5)2)1)1) 2) 5)

2) 5)2) 5)1) 1)

3)

3)

N/W No.:1 PC No.:2

N/W No.:1 PC No.:3

N/W No.:1 PC No.:4

Control system (system A)

Standby system (system B)

Control system (system A)

Standby system (system B)

4) 4)

4) 4)

Ethernet cable

(Redundant system-2: Pair No.2)

(Redundant system-1: Pair No.1)

0 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series

3

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system Redundant system-1 When the system switching occurs, CPU (PLC station No.: 1) takes over the control of the Ethernet network system as the control system. The GOT automatically starts monitoring accroding to the specified system. Redundant system-2 When the system switching occurs, CPU (PLC station No.: 3) takes over the control of the Ethernet network system as the control system. The GOT automatically starts monitoring accroding to the specified system.

For mixed connection of redundant system and Non-redundant system System configuration example The following connection configuration examples are explained.

Connection method Connect the CC-Link IE Field Network system to the GOT. Page 659 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION

PLC Side Setting (GX Works3) Page 138 PLC Side Setting (GX Works3)

GOT Side Settings Page 140 GOT Side Settings

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system Page 141 Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system

GOT

1) Process CPU 2) Redundant function module 3) Tracking cable 4) CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module (GOT connection) 5) CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module (Remote I/O station connection) 6) RCPU 7) I/O module

N/W No.:1 PC No.:0

N/W No.:1 PC No.:1

5)2)1)1) 2) 5)

2) 5)2) 5)1) 1)

3)

3)

N/W No.:1 PC No.:2

N/W No.:1 PC No.:3

N/W No.:1 PC No.:5

Control system (system A)

Standby system (system B)

Control system (system A)

Standby system (system B)

4) 4)

4) 4)

Ethernet cable

N/W No.:1 PC No.:4

6) 4) 7)

(Non-redundant system)

(Redundant system-2: Pair No.2)

(Redundant system-1: Pair No.1)

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series 141

14

Connection to Remote I/O Station in CC-Link IE Field Network Page 142 Ethernet module (mounted on remote I/O station) connection (Single configuration) Page 148 Ethernet module (mounted on remote I/O station) connection (Single-line configuration) Page 153 Ethernet module (mounted on remote I/O station) connection (Double-line configuration) Page 160 Serial communication module (mounted on remote I/O station) connection (Single configuration) Page 162 Serial communication module (mounted on remote I/O station) connection (Single-line configuration) Page 163 Serial communication module (mounted on remote I/O station) connection (Double-line configuration)

Ethernet module (mounted on remote I/O station) connection (Single configuration) System configuration example The following connection example for connecting to the redundant CPU via the remote I/O station connected by Ethernet is explained in this section.

Connection method Connect the Ethernet module (mounted on remote I/O station) to the GOT. Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION

3)

1) Process CPU 2) Redundant function module 3) Tracking cable 4) CC-Link IE Field Network remote head module (RJ72GF15-T2) 5) Ethernet module 6) CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module (RJ71GF11-T2(MR)) 7) I/O module

6)1) 2) 1) 2)

7) 5)

4)

6)

GOT

Ethernet (N/W No. :2)

N/W No. :2 PC No. :2 IP Address :192.168.0.2 Port No. :5001

Standby system (system B)

Control system (system A)

N/W No.:1 PC No.:0 N/W No.:1

PC No.:1

Remote I/O station [Ethernet module] N/W No. :2 PC No. :1 IP Address :192.168.0.1 Port No. :5001

[CC-Link IE Field Network] N/W No.:1 PC No.:2

Remote I/O station

(Redundant system: Pair No.1)

CC-Link IE Field Network (N/W No.:1)

2 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series

3

PLC Side Setting (GX Works3) Redundant CPU (Master station) 1) [Operation mode] Set to [Redundant]. 2) [I/O Assignment] Set [I/O Assignment] in [System parameter]. At [I/O Assignment], assign the redundant function module (R6RFM) and the CC-Link IE field network module (RJ71GF11- T2(MR)).

3) [Module Parameter]-[Required Settings] Set [Module Parameter] of the CC-Link IE field network module (RJ71GF11-T2(MR)).

Item Set value Station type Master station (fixed)

Network No. 1

Station number setting Parameter Editor

Station No. 0 (fixed)

Parameter setting Parameter Editor (fixed)

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series 143

14

4) [Module Parameter]-[Basic Settings] Set [Module Parameter] of the CC-Link IE field network module (RJ71GF11-T2(MR)). Set [Network Topology] to [Ring].

Set [Network Configuration Settings] as follows.

5) [Module Parameter]-[Application Settings] Set [Module Parameter] of the CC-Link IE field network module (RJ71GF11-T2(MR)). At [Redundant System Settings] , set [Module Operation Mode] of standby system (system B) to [Online].

4 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series

3

CC-Link IE Field Network Remote Head Module 1) [Type] Select [RJ72GF15-T2] for [Type].

2) [I/O Assignment] Set [I/O Assignment] in [System parameter]. At [I/O Assignment], assign Ethernet module (RJ71EN71 (E+E) in the following example).

3) [CPU Parameter] Set the network number and station number of RJ72GF15-T2. (1) In the system configuration example, the values are as follows. Network No.: 1 Station No.: 2

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series 145

14

4) Setting of Ethernet module Set the IP address, Network No., and station number to the port communicating with the GOT in the Ethernet module. When setting the IP address, Network No., and station number in a batch Set [Communications by Network No./Station No.] to [Enable] and [Setting Method] to [Use IP Address] so that the third octet of IP address is the network number and the fourth octet is the station number. (1) In the system configuration example, the network number is 2, and the station number is 1, so the value is as follows. IP Address: 192.168.2.1

When setting the IP address, Network No., and station number separately Set [Communications by Network No./Station No.] to [Enable] and [Setting Method] to [Not Use IP Address], and set the IP address, network number, and station number separately. (1) In the system configuration example, the values are as follows. IP Address: 192.168.0.1 Network No.: 2 Station No.: 1

6 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series

3

GOT Side Settings Set GT Designer3 as follows.

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs, CPU (Network No.: 1, PLC station No.: 1) takes over the control of the Ethernet network system as the control system. The GOT automatically starts monitoring accroding to the specified system.

Setting item Contents of setting Model Controller Type MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D

Routing Information

Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION

Device setting (Network setting) Host -

Other Network No. 1

Station No.: 0

Control system/ standby system

The system (control system/standby system) of the the monitor target can be speified. Only when checking [Enable Redundant Function] in the following [MELSEC Redundant System Setting], [Control System/Standby System] can be set.

MELSEC Redundant Setting

Page 215 MELSEC Redundant Setting

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series 147

14

Ethernet module (mounted on remote I/O station) connection (Single-line configuration) System configuration example The following connection example for connecting to the redundant CPU via the remote I/O station connected by Ethernet is explained in this section.

Connection method Connect the Ethernet module (mounted on remote I/O station) to the GOT. Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION

GOT

N/W No.: 2 PC No.: 2 IP Address: 192.168.0.2 Port No.: 5001

Remote I/O station [Ethernet module] N/W No.: 2 PC No.: 1 IP Address: 192.168.0.1 Port No.: 5001

Remote I/O station 2nd [CC-Link IE Field Network] N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 3

Remote I/O station 1st [CC-Link IE Field Network] N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 2

Control system (system A) N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 0

Standby system (system B) N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 1

1) Process CPU 2) Redundant function module 3) Tracking cable 4) CC-Link IE Field Network remote head module(RJ72GF15-T2(SR)) 5) Ethernet module 6) CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module (RJ71GF11-T2(MR)) 7) I/O module

CC-Link IE Field Network (N/W No.: 1)

(Redundant system: Pair No.1)

Ethernet (N/W No.: 2)

5) 7)4)4)

1) 2) 1) 2)6)

3)

6)

8 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series

3

PLC Side Setting (GX Works3) Redundant CPU (Master station) 1) [Operation mode] Set to [Redundant]. 2) [I/O Assignment] Set [I/O Assignment] in [System parameter]. At [I/O Assignment], assign the redundant function module (R6RFM) and the CC-Link IE field network module (RJ71GF11- T2(MR)).

3) [Module Parameter]-[Required Settings] Set [Module Parameter] of the CC-Link IE field network module (RJ71GF11-T2(MR)).

Item Set value Station type Master station (fixed)

Network No. 1

Station number setting Parameter Editor

Station No. 0 (fixed)

Parameter setting Parameter Editor (fixed)

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series 149

15

4) [Module Parameter]-[Basic Settings] Set [Module Parameter] of the CC-Link IE field network module (RJ71GF11-T2(MR)). Set [Network Topology] to [Ring].

Set [Network Configuration Settings] as follows.

5) [Module Parameter]-[Application Settings] Set [Module Parameter] of the CC-Link IE field network module (RJ71GF11-T2(MR)). At [Redundant System Settings] , set [Module Operation Mode] of standby system (system B) to [Online].

0 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series

3

CC-Link IE Field Network Remote Head Module 1) [Type] Select [RJ72GF15-T2(SR)] for [Type].

2) [I/O Assignment] Set [I/O Assignment] in [System parameter]. At [I/O Assignment], assign the following. The second RJ72GF15-T2(SR) Ethernet module (RJ71EN71 (E+E) in the following example).

3) [CPU Parameter] Set the network number and station number of RJ72GF15-T2(SR). (1) In the system configuration example, the values are as follows. Network No. : 1 Station No. : 2

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series 151

15

4) Setting of Ethernet module Set the IP address, Network No., and station number to the port communicating with the GOT in the Ethernet module. When setting the IP address, Network No., and station number in a batch Set [Communications by Network No./Station No.] to [Enable] and [Setting Method] to [Use IP Address] so that the third octet of IP address is the network number and the fourth octet is the station number. (1) In the system configuration example, the network number is 2, and the station number is 1, so the value is as follows. IP Address: 192.168.2.1

When setting the IP address, Network No., and station number separately Set [Communications by Network No./Station No.] to [Enable] and [Setting Method] to [Not Use IP Address], and set the the IP address, network number, and station number separately. (1) In the system configuration example, the values are as follows. IP Address: 192.168.0.1 Network No.: 2 Station No.: 1

GOT Side Settings Page 142 Ethernet module (mounted on remote I/O station) connection (Single configuration)

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs, CPU (Network No.: 1, PLC station No.: 1) takes over the control of the Ethernet network system as the control system. The GOT automatically starts monitoring accroding to the specified system.

2 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series

3

Ethernet module (mounted on remote I/O station) connection (Double-line configuration) System configuration example The following connection example for connecting to the redundant CPU via the remote I/O station connected by Ethernet is explained in this section.

Connection method Connect the Ethernet module (mounted on remote I/O station) to the GOT. Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION

Remote I/O station 2nd [CC-Link IE Field Network] N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 3

7)4)4)

GOT

N/W No.: 2 PC No.: 2 IP Address: 192.168.0.2 Port No.: 5001

Remote I/O station [Ethernet module] N/W No.: 2 PC No.: 1 IP Address:192.168.0.1 Port No.: 5001

Remote I/O station 1st [CC-Link IE Field Network] N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 2

Control system (system A) N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 0

Standby system (system B) N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 0

1) Process CPU 2) Redundant function module 3) Tracking cable 4) CC-Link IE Field Network remote head module (RJ72GF15-T2(LR)) 5) Ethernet module 6) CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module (RJ71GF11-T2(LR)) 7) I/O module

CC-Link IE Field Network (N/W No.: 1)

(Redundant system: Pair No.1)

Ethernet (N/W No.: 2)

5) 7)4)4)

1) 2) 1) 2)6)

3)

6)

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series 153

15

PLC Side Setting (GX Works3) Redundant CPU (Master station) 1) [Operation mode] Set to [Redundant]. 2) [I/O Assignment] Set [I/O Assignment] in [System parameter]. At [I/O Assignment], assign the redundant function module (R6RFM) and the CC-Link IE field network module (RJ71GF11- T2(LR)).

3) [Module Parameter]-[Required Settings] Set [Module Parameter] of the CC-Link IE field network module (RJ71GF11-T2(LR)).

Item Set value Station type Master station (Double-line) (fixed)

Network No. 1

Station number setting Parameter Editor (fixed)

Station No. 0 (fixed)

Parameter setting Parameter Editor (fixed)

4 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series

3

4) [Module Parameter]-[Basic Settings] Set [Module Parameter] of the CC-Link IE field network module (RJ71GF11-T2(LR)). Set [Network Topology] to [Ring].

Set [Network Configuration Settings] as follows.

5) [Module Parameter]-[Application Settings] Set [Module Parameter] of the CC-Link IE field network module (RJ71GF11-T2(LR)). At [Redundant System Settings], set [Module Operation Mode] of standby system (system B) to [Online].

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series 155

15

CC-Link IE Field Network Remote Head Module (1st) 1) [Type] Select [RJ72GF15-T2(LR)] for [Type].

2) [I/O Assignment] Set [I/O Assignment] in [System parameter]. At [I/O Assignment], assign the following. RJ72GF15-T2(LR) Ethernet module (RJ71EN71 (E+E) in the following example).

3) [CPU Parameter] Set the network number and station number of RJ72GF15-T2(LR). (1) In the system configuration example, the values are as follows. Network No. : 1 Station No. : 2

6 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series

3

4) Setting of Ethernet module Set the IP address, Network No., and station number to the port communicating with the GOT in the Ethernet module. When setting the IP address, Network No., and station number in a batch Set [Communications by Network No./Station No.] to [Enable] and [Setting Method] to [Use IP Address] so that the third octet of IP address is the network number and the fourth octet is the station number. (1) In the system configuration example, the network number is 2, and the station number is 1, so the value is as follows. IP Address : 192.168.2.1

When setting the IP address, Network No., and station number separately Set [Communications by Network No./Station No.] to [Enable] and [Setting Method] to [Not Use IP Address], and set the IP address, network number, and station number separately. (1) In the system configuration example, the values are as follows. IP Address : 192.168.0.1 Network No. : 2 Station No. : 1

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series 157

15

CC-Link IE Field Network Remote Head Module (2nd) [Type] Select [RJ72GF15-T2(LR)] for [Type].

[I/O Assignment] Set [I/O Assignment] in [System parameter]. At [I/O Assignment], assign the following. RJ72GF15-T2(LR))

[CPU Parameter] Set the network number and station number of RJ72GF15-T2(LR). (1) In the system configuration example, the values are as follows. Network No. : 1 Station No. : 3

8 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series

3

GOT Side Settings Page 142 Ethernet module (mounted on remote I/O station) connection (Single configuration)

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs, CPU (Network No.: 1, PLC station No.: 1) takes over the control of the Ethernet network system as the control system. The GOT automatically starts monitoring accroding to the specified system.

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series 159

16

Serial communication module (mounted on remote I/O station) connection (Single configuration) System configuration example The following connection example for connecting to the redundant CPU via the remote I/O station connected by Serial communication module is explained in this section.

Connection method Connect the serial communication module (mounted on remote I/O station) to the GOT. Page 435 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION

PLC Side Setting (GX Works3) Redundant CPU (Master station) Page 142 Ethernet module (mounted on remote I/O station) connection (Single configuration) CC-Link IE Field Network Remote Head Module Page 142 Ethernet module (mounted on remote I/O station) connection (Single configuration) At [I/O Assignment], replace the Ethernet module with the serial communication module and assign the module.

1) Process CPU 2) Redundant function module 3) Tracking cable 4) CC-Link IE Field Network remote head module (RJ72GF15-T2) 5) Serial communication module 6) CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module (RJ71GF11-T2(MR)) 7) I/O module

6)1) 2) 1) 2)

7)

3)

5) 4)

6)

Standby system (system B)

Control system (system A)

N/W No.:1 PC No.:0 N/W No.:1

PC No.:1

Remote I/O station [CC-Link IE Field Network] N/W No.:1 PC No.:2

Remote I/O station

RS232

(Redundant system: Pair No.1)

CC-Link IE Field Network (N/W No.:1)

GOT

0 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series

3

GOT Side Settings Set GT Designer3 as follows.

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs, CPU (Network No.: 1, PLC station No.: 1) takes over the control of the Ethernet network system as the control system. The GOT automatically starts monitoring accroding to the specified system.

Setting item Contents of setting Model Controller Type MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D

Device setting (Network setting) Host -

Other Network No. 1

Station No.: Station number of the control system

Control system/ standby system

The system (control system/standby system) of the the monitor target can be speified. Only when checking [Enable Redundant Function] in the following [MELSEC Redundant System Setting], [Control System/Standby System] can be set.

MELSEC Redundant Setting

Page 215 MELSEC Redundant Setting

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series 161

16

Serial communication module (mounted on remote I/O station) connection (Single-line configuration) System configuration example The following connection example for connecting to the redundant CPU via the remote I/O station connected by Serial communication module is explained in this section.

Connection method Connect the serial communication module (mounted on remote I/O station) to the GOT. Page 435 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION

PLC Side Setting (GX Works3) Redundant CPU (Master station) Page 148 Ethernet module (mounted on remote I/O station) connection (Single-line configuration) CC-Link IE Field Network Remote Head Module Page 148 Ethernet module (mounted on remote I/O station) connection (Single-line configuration) At [I/O Assignment], replace the Ethernet module with the serial communication module and assign the module.

GOT Side Settings Page 160 Serial communication module (mounted on remote I/O station) connection (Single configuration)

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs, CPU (Network No.: 1, PLC station No.: 1) takes over the control of the Ethernet network system as the control system. The GOT automatically starts monitoring accroding to the specified system.

GOT RS232

Remote I/O station 2nd [CC-Link IE Field Network] N/W No. :1 PC No. :3

Remote I/O station 1st [CC-Link IE Field Network] N/W No. :1 PC No. :2

Control system (system A) N/W No. :1 PC No. :0

Standby system (system B) N/W No. :1 PC No. :1

1) Process CPU 2) Redundant function module 3) Tracking cable 4) CC-Link IE Field Network remote head module (RJ72GF15-T2(SR)) 5) Serial communication module 6) CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module (RJ71GF11-T2(MR)) 7) I/O module

CC-Link IE Field Network (N/W No. :1)

(Redundant system: Pair No.1)

5) 7)4)4)

1) 2) 1) 2)6)

3)

6)

2 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series

3

Serial communication module (mounted on remote I/O station) connection (Double-line configuration) System configuration example The following connection example for connecting to the redundant CPU via the remote I/O station connected by Serial communication module is explained in this section.

Connection method Connect the serial communication module (mounted on remote I/O station) to the GOT. Page 435 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION

PLC Side Setting (GX Works3) Redundant CPU (Master station) Page 153 Ethernet module (mounted on remote I/O station) connection (Double-line configuration) CC-Link IE Field Network Remote Head Module (1st) Page 153 Ethernet module (mounted on remote I/O station) connection (Double-line configuration) At [I/O Assignment], replace the Ethernet module with the serial communication module and assign the module. CC-Link IE Field Network Remote Head Module (2nd) Page 153 Ethernet module (mounted on remote I/O station) connection (Double-line configuration)

GOT Side Settings Page 160 Serial communication module (mounted on remote I/O station) connection (Single configuration)

GOT RS232

Remote I/O station 2nd [CC-Link IE Field Network] N/W No. :1 PC No. :3

7)4)4) Remote I/O station 1st [CC-Link IE Field Network] N/W No. :1 PC No. :2

Control system (system A) N/W No. :1 PC No. :0

Standby system (system B) N/W No. :1 PC No. :0

1) Process CPU 2) Redundant function module 3) Tracking cable 4) CC-Link IE Field Network remote head module(RJ72GF15-T2(LR)) 5) Serial communication module 6) CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module (RJ71GF11-T2(LR)) 7) I/O module

CC-Link IE Field Network (N/W No. :1)

(Redundant system: Pair No.1)

5) 7)4)4)

1) 2) 1) 2)6)

3)

6)

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series 163

16

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs, CPU (Network No.: 1, PLC station No.: 1) takes over the control of the Ethernet network system as the control system. The GOT automatically starts monitoring accroding to the specified system.

4 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series

3

Connection to CC-Link (intelligent device station)

One-to-one connection of GOT and redundant system System configuration example The following connection configuration examples are explained.

Connection method Connect the CC-Link (intelligent device station) to the GOT. Page 689 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION)

GOT

1) Process CPU 2) Redundant function module 3) Tracking cable 4) CC-Link(ID) 5) CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module

2) 5)2) 5)1) 1)

3)

N/W No.:0 PC No.:0

N/W No.:0 PC No.:1

N/W No.:0 PC No.:2

Control system (system A) Standby system (system B)4)

4)

CC-Link cable

(Redundant system: Pair No.1)

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series 165

16

PLC Side Setting (GX Works3) Control system (system A) PLC setting Module parameter

Control system (system B) PLC setting Module parameter

Item Set value Station type Master station (Redundant function is supported)

Mode Remote net (Ver.2 mode)

Station No. 0 (fixed)

Transmission speed 156kbps

Parameter setting Parameter (fixed)

Item Set value Station type Standby master station

Mode Remote net (Ver.2 mode)

Station No. 1

Transmission speed Auto-tracking

Parameter setting Parameter (fixed)

6 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series

3

GOT Side Settings Set GT Designer3 as follows.

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs, CPU (Network No.: 0, PLC station No.: 1) takes over the control of the Ethernet network system as the control system. The GOT automatically starts monitoring accroding to the specified system.

Setting item Contents of setting Model Controller Type MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D

Device setting (Network setting) Host -

Other Network No. 0

Station No.: Station number of the control system

Control system/ standby system

The system (control system/standby system) of the the monitor target can be speified. Only when checking [Enable Redundant Function] in the following [MELSEC Redundant System Setting], [Control System/Standby System] can be set.

MELSEC Redundant Setting Check [Enable Redundant Function]. A pairing setting is not required.

Page 215 MELSEC Redundant Setting

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series 167

16

When connecting via the serial communication unit

One-to-one connection of GOT and redundant system System configuration example The following connection example for connecting to the redundant CPU via the remote I/O station connected by Serial communication module is explained in this section.

Connection method Connect the serial communication module (mounted on remote I/O station) to the GOT. Page 435 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION

PLC Side Setting (GX Works3) Redundant CPU Page 132 Connection to CC-Link IE Controller Network Single RCPU

Page 619 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION

Item Set value Network No. 1

Station No. 3

GOT

1) Process CPU 2) Redundant function module 3) Tracking cable 4) RCPU 5) Serial communication module 6) CC-Link Controller Network module 7) I/O module 8) CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module

2) 8)2) 8)1) 1)

3)

N/W No.:1 PC No.:1

N/W No.:1 PC No.:2

Control system (system A)

Standby system (system B)

6) 6)

N/W No.:1 PC No.:3

RS232

4) 5)

6) 7)

Optical cable

Single RCPU

(Redundant system: Pair No.1)

8 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series

3

GOT Side Settings Set GT Designer3 as follows.

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs, CPU (Network No.: 1, PLC station No.: 2) takes over the control of the Ethernet network system as the control system. The GOT automatically starts monitoring accroding to the specified system.

Setting item Contents of setting Model Controller Type MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D

Device setting (Network setting) Host -

Other Network No. 1

Station No.: Station number of the control system

Control system/ standby system

The system (control system/standby system) of the the monitor target can be speified. Only when checking [Enable Redundant Function] in the following [MELSEC Redundant System Setting], [Control System/Standby System] can be set.

MELSEC Redundant Setting

Page 215 MELSEC Redundant Setting

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series 169

17

When connecting via the extension base unit for the redundant system

Serial communication connection System configuration example The following describes a connection configuration example for connecting the GOT to a redundant CPU via the serial communication module mounted on the extension base unit for the redundant system.

Connection method Connect the serial communication module (mounted on the extension base unit for the redundant system) to the GOT. For details on the system configuration, refer to the following. Page 435 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION

PLC settings (GX Works3) and GOT settings Redundant system settings are not required. Set the connection with the serial communication module. For the setting details, refer to the following. Page 435 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION

Change of the monitoring target when system switching occurs in the redundant system When the system switching occurs, CPU (connected to IN2 of the extension base unit for the redundant system) takes over the control of the Ethernet network system as the control system. The GOT automatically starts monitoring according to the specified system.

2)1) 2)1)

3)

4)

1) Process CPU 2) Redundant function module 3) Tracking cable 4) Extension cable 5) Serial communication module 6) Extension base unit for the redundant system

5)

6)

Control system (system A) Connected to IN1

Standby system (system B) Connected to IN2

RS232

GOTIN1

IN2

0 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series

3

Ethernet connection System configuration example The following describes a connection configuration example for connecting the GOT to a redundant CPU via the Ethernet module mounted on the extension base unit for the redundant system.

Connection method Connect the Ethernet module (mounted on the extension base unit for the redundant system) to the GOT. For details on the system configuration, refer to the following. Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION

PLC settings (GX Works3) and GOT settings Redundant system settings are not required. Set the connection with the Ethernet module. For the setting details, refer to the following. Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION

Change of the monitoring target when system switching occurs in the redundant system When the system switching occurs, CPU (connected to IN2 of the extension base unit for the redundant system) takes over the control of the Ethernet network system as the control system. The GOT automatically starts monitoring according to the specified system.

2)1) 2)1)

3)

4)

1) Process CPU 2) Redundant function module 3) Tracking cable 4) Extension cable 5) Ethernet module 6) Extension base unit for the redundant system

6)

5)

N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 18 IP address: 192.168.3.18 Port No.: 5001

N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 1 IP address: 192.168.3.3 Port No.: 5001

Control system (system A) Connected to IN1

Standby system (system B) Connected to IN2

IN1

IN2

Ethernet

GOT

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series 171

17

CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) System configuration example The following describes a connection configuration example for connecting the GOT to a redundant CPU via the CC-Link module mounted on the extension base unit for the redundant system.

Connection method Connect the CC-Link module (mounted on the extension base unit for the redundant system) to the GOT. For details on the system configuration, refer to the following. Page 689 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION)

PLC settings (GX Works3) and GOT settings Redundant system settings are not required. Configure the settings for connection with the CC-Link module. For the setting details, refer to the following. Page 689 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION)

Change of the monitoring target when system switching occurs in the redundant system When the system switching occurs, CPU (connected to IN2 of the extension base unit for the redundant system) takes over the control of the Ethernet network system as the control system. The GOT automatically starts monitoring according to the specified system.

2)1) 2)1)

3)

4)

1) Process CPU 2) Redundant function module 3) Tracking cable 4) Extension cable 5) CC-Link(ID) 6) Extension base unit for the redundant system

6)

N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 1

N/W No.: 1 PC No. :0

Control system (system A) Connected to IN1

Standby system (system B) Connected to IN2

IN1

IN2

5) CC-Link cable

GOT

2 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series

3

Precautions

Start of the redundant system When connected to the redundant system, the GOT starts monitoring after the control system and standby system are decided, regardless of the starting order of the PLC systems A and B. The GOT starts monitoring when both systems start. (For the redundant system configured with a redundant extension base unit, the GOT starts monitoring the system that starts first, which is the control system.) Power on the redundant system within the time set in the GOT (communication timeout time and number of retries) so that the GOT can start monitoring after the redundant system starts (after the control system is decided). If the power supply does not start within the time set on the GOT, the GOT stops monitoring for safety reasons, and the following system alarm occurs. 451: The MELSEC redundant setting and actual system configuration do not match. If the system alarm occurs, restart the GOT (reapply or reset the power supply) to start monitoring again.

System switching When system is switched by user program The communication path does not change, and the GOT follows the monitor. The system alarm is not displayed.

When system switches because of a dislocated cable, etc. When system switches because of a dislocated cable, etc. "450 Path has changed or timeout occurred in redundant system." appears as the system alarm.

Redundant system configuration and operation mode System alarm display With the following system configuration "451: MELSEC Redundant setting and actual system configuration do not match" will appear as the system alarm, and the GOT will not be able to correctly monitor the redundant system's CPU. If the system alarm occurs, restart the GOT (reapply or reset the power supply) to start monitoring again. System configuration with MELSEC redundant settings that do not match the actual redundant system System configuration in which the redundant system operation mode is not the backup mode

Changing the MELSEC redundant settings Always reset the GOT after changing the MELSEC redundant settings. If not reset, the changed MELSEC redundant settings will not be applied on the GOT.

When non-redundant system is monitored after setting MELSEC redundant settings If the MELSEC redundant settings were set for a non-redundant system, the GOT will operate normally. In this case, if an abnormality (such as powering OFF, or communication timeout error) occurs at the PLC CPU for which the MELSEC redundant setting has been made, the PLC CPU may operate in a different way from the monitoring target change mode that was set in the MELSEC redundant setting.

When redundant system is monitored without making MELSEC redundant setting When the MELSEC redundant setting is not made, the GOT does not automatically change the monitoring target even if system switching occurs in the redundant system. When the GOT is connected to the standby system, data written to a device are overwritten by the data of the control system, failing to be reflected. In this case, when data are written to a device in the standby system normally, the system alarm "315 Device writing error. Correct device." is not detected.

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series 173

17

When connecting with CC-Link(ID) When system switching is occurred by the following factors, data link control of CC-Link(ID) does not move from the master station of the new standby system to the standby master station of the new control system and the GOT cannot follow the monitor. Make sure that the standby master station of the new control system should control data link. For details of the ladder program for data link control, refer to the following manuals. MELSEC iQ-R Series MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual (Application) Execution of the system switching instruction at the PLC side Execution of system switching operation using the engineering tool Execution of system switching request from other network modules. When system switching is occurred by the above factors, data link control does not move to the standby master station because the master station of the new standby system can communicate with the GOT. Also, the new control system is the standby master station without changing. Therefore, the GOT monitors the master station without following the new control system/new standby system and cannot monitor the redundant system.

4 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series

3

3.2 MELSEC Q Series

This section explains the restrictions on the connection methods and other information applicable when the QCPU redundant system is monitored by the GOT.

In a redundant system, the monitoring can be performed with the monitoring target specified as the control system or the standby system on the GOT. By specifying the monitoring target PLC CPU as the control system of the redundant system, the monitoring target is automatically changed to the PLC CPU in the control system when system switching occurs. To enable this automatic changing of the monitoring target at the GOT, settings are required in the GT Designer3. Page 215 MELSEC Redundant Setting

Monitor target

MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

Direct CPU connection (serial)

GOT

Station No. 0 (Multiplexed remote master station)

Q 25PR

H C

PU

Q J71LP21-25

Q J71BR

11

Q J71E71-100

Q J61BT11N

Station No. 1 (Multiplexed remote sub master station)

Standby system

(System B)

Q 25PR

H C

PU

Q J71LP21-25

Q J71BR

11

Q J71E71-100

Q J61BT11N

Station No. 2 (remote I/O station)

Tracking cable

Q J72LP25-25

Q J71C

24N The GOT monitors the control system PLC CPU.

When an error occurs in System A, System B switches from standby system to control system.

Monitor target

MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

Direct CPU connection (serial)

GOT

Station No. 0 (Multiplexed remote master station)

Standby system

(System A)

Q 25PR

H C

PU

Q J71LP21-25

Q J71BR

11

Q J71E71-100

Q J61BT11N

Station No. 1 (Multiplexed remote sub master station)

Q 25PR

H C

PU

Q J71LP21-25

Q J71BR

11

Q J71E71-100

Q J61BT11N

Station No. 2 (remote I/O station)

Tracking cable

Q J72LP25-25

Q J71C

24N

The GOT monitors the PLC CPU of the new control system after system switching.

Em pty

Em pty

Pow er supply

m odule

Pow er supply

m odule

Em pty

Em pty

Pow er supply

m odule

Pow er supply

m odule

Em pty

Em pty

Pow er supply

m odule

Em pty

Em pty

Pow er supply

m odule

Control system

(System A)

Control system

(System B)

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.2 MELSEC Q Series 175

17

The following connection methods are available for the QCPU redundant system. Connection to remote I/O station in MELSECNET/H network system Direct CPU connection (serial) (Remote I/O station of MELSECNET/H network system) Page 179 Direct CPU connection (serial) Serial communication connection (Serial communication module mounted on remote I/O station of MELSECNET/H network

system) Page 180 Serial communication connection Ethernet connection (Ethernet module mounted on the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system) Page 181 Ethernet connection Direct CPU connection (serial) Page 182 Direct CPU connection (serial) CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) Page 188 CC-Link connection (Intelligent device station) CC-Link connection (Via G4) Page 190 CC-Link connection (Via G4) MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection (Network system) Page 192 MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 connections (Network systems) CC-Link IE Controller Network connection (Network system) Page 193 CC-Link IE controller network connection (Network system) Ethernet connection Page 194 Ethernet connection Connection to the redundant type extension base unit Serial communication connection (Serial communication module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit) Page 196 Serial communication connection (Connection to the Serial communication module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit) Ethernet connection (Ethernet module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit) Page 197 Ethernet connection (Connection to the Ethernet module mounted on redundant type extension base unit) CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) (CC-Link module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit) Page 198 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) (Connection to the CC-Link module mounted on redundant type extension base unit) CC-Link connection (Via G4) (CC-Link module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit) Page 199 CC-Link connection (Via G4) (Connection to the CC-Link module mounted on redundant type extension base unit) For details of PLC CPUs that can be monitored in each connection method of GOT, refer to the following. Monitorable controllers of each chapter

6 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.2 MELSEC Q Series

3

The following table shows the features of each connection method.

Connection type Before system switching After system switching Direct CPU connection (serial)

(Remote I/O station of MELSECNET/H network system) Serial communication

connection (Serial communication module mounted on the remote I/O station on MELSECNET/H network system) Ethernet connection

(Ethernet module mounted on the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system)

The monitoring target is automatically changed to the control system PLC CPU.

Direct CPU connection (serial)

By the MELSEC redundant setting, the GOT automatically changes the monitoring target to the PLC CPU in the control system.*1

Monitor the PLC CPU of the control system by GOT1. Monitor the PLC CPU of the control system by GOT2.

CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) CC-Link connection (Via G4)

The monitoring target is automatically changed to the control system PLC CPU.

Control system

Multiplexed remote master station

MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

Standby system

Multiplexed remote sub master station

GOT1

Direct CPU connection (serial)

GOT3

Ethernet connection

GOT2

Serial communication connection

Remote I/O station

Ethernet module

Serial communication module

Standby system Control system

MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

Multiplexed remote sub master station

GOT1

Direct CPU connection (serial)

GOT3

Ethernet connection

GOT2

Serial communication connection

Remote I/O station

Ethernet module

Serial communication module

Multiplexed remote master station

GOT

MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

Standby system

Remote I/O station

Control system

Multiplexed remote master station

Multiplexed remote sub-master station

GOT

MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

Remote I/O station

Multiplexed remote master station

Multiplexed remote sub-master station

Standby system Control system

GOT1 GOT2

MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

Remote I/O station

Multiplexed remote master station

Multiplexed remote sub-master station

Standby system Control system

GOT1 GOT2

MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

Remote I/O station

Multiplexed remote master station

Multiplexed remote sub-master station

Standby system Control system

Intelligent device station

Master station

GOT1

Standby master station

AJ65BT-G4-S3

CC-Link GOT2

Control system

Standby system

Master station Standby master station

Control system

Standby system

GOT1

CC-Link GOT2

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.2 MELSEC Q Series 177

17

*1 To monitor the control system after the system switching without the MELSEC redundant setting, change the cable connection from the PLC CPU in the previous control system to the control system after system switching.

*2 To monitor the control system after the system switching without the MELSEC redundancy setting, refer to the following. Page 200 Switch the Monitor Target to the Control System Using the Script Function

MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/ 10 connection

(Network system)

By the MELSEC redundant setting, the GOT automatically changes the monitoring target to the PLC CPU in the control system.*2

CC-Link IE Controller Network connection (Network system)

By the MELSEC redundant setting, the GOT automatically changes the monitoring target to the PLC CPU in the control system.*2

Ethernet connection

By the MELSEC redundant setting, the GOT automatically changes the monitoring target to the PLC CPU in the control system.*2

Serial communication connection

(Serial communication module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit) Ethernet connection

(Ethernet module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit) CC-Link connection

(intelligent device station) (CC-Link module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit) CC-Link connection (Via G4)

(CC-Link module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit)

Connection type Before system switching After system switching

GOT Station No.3 (normal station)

MELSECNET/H PLC to PLC network (MELSECNET/H mode or MELSECNET/10 mode)

Station No.1 (control station)

Station No.2 (normal station)

Control system

Standby system

GOT Station No.3 (normal station)

MELSECNET/H PLC to PLC network (MELSECNET/H mode or MELSECNET/10 mode)

Station No.1 (normal station)

Station No.2 (sub control station)

Control system

Standby system

GOT Station No.3 (normal station)

Station No.1 (control station)

Station No.2 (normal station)

Control system

Standby system

CC-Link IE Controller Network

GOT Station No.3 (normal station)

Station No.1 (normal station)

Station No.2 (sub control station)

Control system

Standby system

CC-Link IE Controller Network

GOT

Control system

Standby system

Station No. 3

Station No. 1 Station No. 2

Ethernet GOT

Standby system

Control system

Station No. 3

Station No. 1

Station No. 2

Ethernet

CC-Link module

Serial communication module

Ethernet module

CC-Link connection

Serial communication connection

Ethernet connection

GOT3GOT2GOT1

Control system

Station No. 1

Station No. 2

CC-Link module

Serial communication module

Ethernet module

CC-Link connection

Serial communication connection

Ethernet connection

GOT3GOT2GOT1

Control system

Station No. 1

Standby system

Station No. 2

8 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.2 MELSEC Q Series

3

Connection to remote I/O station in MELSECNET/H network system

Direct CPU connection (serial) This section explains the direct CPU connection (serial) used to connect the GOT to the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system. The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system.

Connection method Connect the GOT to the RS-232 interface of the network module (QJ72LP25-25, QJ72LP25G, QJ72BR15) on the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system. For details, refer to the following. Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL)

GT Designer3 setting Set GT Designer3 as follows.

In this case, the GOT monitoring is performed by transient transmission of the MELSECNET/H network system. Therefore, a longer time-lag occurs for displaying objects compared with directly monitoring the PLC CPU. For displaying objects with a shorter time-lag, set the device for link devices B and W of the host station set in the MELSECNET/H network and execute the cyclic transmission. For details, refer to the following manual. Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (Remote I/Q network)

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs, the multiplexed remote sub master station switched to the control system takes over the master operation of MELSECNET/H. Since the GOT monitors the master station, the monitoring target is automatically changed to the PLC CPU that is operating as the master.

Setting item Settings Model Controller Type MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700

Device setting (Network setting) Other NW No.: Network No. of MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

Station No.: 0 (Master station)

MELSEC Redundant Setting Do not set the item.

Monitor target

MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

Direct CPU connection (serial)

GOT

Network No. 1, Station No. 0 (Multiplexed remote master station)

Control system (System A)

Q 25PR

H C

PU

Q J71LP21-25

Q J71BR

11

Q J71E71-100

Q J61BT11N

Network No. 1, Station No. 1 (Multiplexed remote sub master station)

Standby system (System B)

Q 25PR

H C

PU

Q J71LP21-25

Q J71BR

11

Q J71E71-100

Q J61BT11N

Q J72LP25-25

Q J71C

24N Network No. 1, Station No. 2 (Remote I/O station)

Em pty

Em pty

Pow er supply

m odule

Em pty

Pow er supply

m odule

Em pty

Pow er supply

m odule

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.2 MELSEC Q Series 179

18

Serial communication connection This section explains the serial communication connection that connects the GOT to the serial communication module mounted on the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system. The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the serial communication module mounted on the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system.

Connection method Connect the GOT to the serial communication module (QJ71C24, QJ71C24-R2, QJ71C24N, QJ71C24N-R2, QJ71C24N-R4) or modem interface module (QJ71CM0) mounted on the remote I/ O station of the MELSECNET/H network system. For details, refer to the following. Page 435 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION

GT Designer3 setting Set GT Designer3 as follows.

In this case, the GOT monitoring is performed by transient transmission of the MELSECNET/H network system. Therefore, a longer time-lag occurs for displaying objects compared with directly monitoring the PLC CPU. For displaying objects with a shorter time-lag, set the device for link devices B and W of the host station set in the MELSECNET/H network and execute the cyclic transmission. For details, refer to the following manual. Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (Remote I/Q network)

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs, the multiplexed remote sub master station switched to the control system takes over the master operation of MELSECNET/H. Since the GOT monitors the master station, the monitoring target is automatically changed to the PLC CPU that is operating as the master.

Setting item Settings Model Controller Type MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700

Device setting (Network setting) Other NW No.: Network No. of MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

Station No.: 0 (Master station)

MELSEC Redundant Setting Do not set the item.

Monitor target

MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

Serial communication connection

GOT

Network No. 1, Station No. 0 (Multiplexed remote master station)

Q 25P

R H

C P

U

Q J71LP

21-25

Q J71B

R 11

Q J71E

71-100

Q J61B

T11N

Network No. 1, Station No. 1 (Multiplexed remote sub master station)

Standby system (System B)

Q 25P

R H

C P

U

Q J71LP

21-25

Q J71B

R 11

Q J71E

71-100

Q J61B

T11N

Q J72LP

25-25

Q J71C

24N

Network No. 1, Station No. 2 (Remote I/O station)

E m

pty

E m

pty

E m

pty

E m

pty

P ow

er supply m

odule

P ow

er supply m

odule

P ow

er supply m

odule

Control system (System A)

0 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.2 MELSEC Q Series

3

Ethernet connection This section explains the Ethernet connection for connecting the GOT to the Ethernet module mounted on the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system. The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the Ethernet module mounted on the I/O station of the MELESCNET/H network system.

Connection method Connect the GOT to the Ethernet module (QJ71E71-100, QJ71E71-B5, QJ71E71-B2, QJ71E71) mounted on the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system. For details, refer to the following. Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION

GT Designer3 setting Set GT Designer3 as follows.

In this case, the GOT monitoring is performed by transient transmission of the MELSECNET/H network system. Therefore, a longer time-lag occurs for displaying objects compared with directly monitoring the PLC CPU. For displaying objects with a shorter time-lag, set the device for link devices B and W of the host station set in the MELSECNET/H network and execute the cyclic transmission. For details, refer to the following manual. Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (Remote I/Q network)

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs, the multiplexed remote sub master station switched to the control system takes over the master operation of MELSECNET/H. Since the GOT monitors the master station, the monitoring target is automatically changed to the PLC CPU that is operating as the master.

Setting item Settings Model Controller Type MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700

Device setting (Network setting) Other NW No.: Network No. of MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

Station No.: 0 (Master station)

MELSEC Redundant Setting Do not set the item.

Routing Information Setting Page 259 Routing parameter setting

Monitor target

Control system (System A)

Network No. 1, Station No. 0 (Multiplexed remote master station)

Network No. 1, Station No. 2 (remote I/O station)

Network No. 2, Station No. 3

Network No. 2, Station No. 2

Ethernet

GOT

MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

Network No. 1, Station No. 1 (Multiplexed remote sub master station)

Standby system (System B)

P ow

er supply m

odule

Q 25P

R H

C P

U

Q 25P

R H

C P

U

Q J71LP

21-25

Q J72LP

25-25

Q J71E

71-100

Q J71LP

21-25

Q J71B

R 11

Q J71B

R 11

Q J71E

71-100

Q J61B

T11N P

ow er supply

m odule

P ow

er supply m

odule

E m

pty

E m

pty

E m

pty

E m

pty

Q J71E

71-100

Q J61B

T11N

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.2 MELSEC Q Series 181

18

Direct CPU connection (serial) This section explains the direct CPU connection (serial) used to connect the GOT to a PLC CPU in the redundant system. For the direct CPU connection (serial), use one GOT or two GOTs.

When using one GOT

Connection method Connect the GOT to the RS-232 interface of the control system CPU module (Q12PRHCPU, Q25PRHCPU) of the redundant system. For details, refer to the following. Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL)

GT Designer3 setting Set GT Designer3 as follows.

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs, the PLC CPU (other station) of the control system after system switching takes over the host station operation. Since the GOT monitors the control system, the monitoring target is automatically changed to other station.

To monitor the control system without MELSEC redundant setting If the system switching occurs when the MELSEC redundant setting is not made, the GOT cannot change the monitoring target at the occurrence of system switching since it monitors the connected PLC CPU (host station). As a countermeasure, change the cable connection from the PLC CPU in the previous control system to the control system after system switching.

Setting item Settings Model Controller Type MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700

Device setting (Network setting) Host

MELSEC Redundant Setting Page 215 MELSEC Redundant Setting

Monitor target

MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

Direct CPU connection (serial)

GOT

Network No. 1, Station No. 0 (Multiplexed remote master station)

Control system (System A)

Q 25PR

H C

PU

Pow er

supply m odule

Q J71LP21-25

Q J71BR

11

Q J71E71-100

Q J61BT11N

Em pty

Pow er

supply m odule

Em pty

Pow er

supply m odule

Em pty

Em pty

Network No. 1, Station No. 1 (Multiplexed remote sub master station)

Standby system (System B)

Q J72LP25-25

Q J71C

24N

Network No. 1, Station No. 2 (remote I/O station)

Q 25PR

H C

PU

Q J71LP21-25

Q J71BR

11

Q J71E71-100

Q J61BT11N

2 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.2 MELSEC Q Series

3

When using two GOTs Connect a GOT to each PLC CPU to respond to the system switching.

Connection method Connect GOTs to the RS-232 interface of the control system and standby system CPU modules (Q12PRHCPU, Q25PRHCPU) of the redundant system. For details, refer to the following. Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL)

GT Designer3 setting Set GT Designer3 as follows.

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs, the GOT cannot change the monitor target automatically in response to the system switching. The GOT that is connected to the control system CPU module after system switching continues the monitoring. Different from the case using one GOT, no cable reconnection is required.

To automatically change the monitoring target after system switching using one GOT, make the MELSEC redundant settings. Page 215 MELSEC Redundant Setting

Setting item Settings Model Controller Type MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700

Device setting (Network setting) Host

MELSEC Redundant Setting Page 215 MELSEC Redundant Setting

Monitor target

Network No. 1, Station No. 0 (Multiplexed remote master station)

Network No. 1, Station No. 1 (Multiplexed remote sub master station)

Network No. 1, Station No. 2 (remote I/O station)

Pow er supply

m odule

Pow er supply

m odule

Pow er supply

m odule

MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

Direct CPU connection (serial)

GOT1

Control system (System A)

Em pty

Q 25PR

H C

PU

Q J71LP21-25

Q J71BR

11

Q J71E71-100

Q J61BT11N

Standby system (System B)

Q J72LP25-25

Q J71C

24N

Em pty

Q 25PR

H C

PU

Q J71LP21-25

Q J71BR

11

Q J71E71-100

Q J61BT11N

Em pty

Em pty

Direct CPU connection (serial)

GOT2

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.2 MELSEC Q Series 183

18

Precautions for direct CPU connection (serial) to a CPU in the redundant system without making MELSEC redundant setting As the GOT monitors exclusively the PLC CPU that is directly connected to, the monitor target cannot be changed in

response to the system switching of the redundant system. To change the target monitor in response to the system switching, change the target of the connection cable between the GOT and PLC CPU to the other PLC CPU, or configure the system using GOTs connected to each PLC CPU. When monitoring a PLC CPU in the redundant system using the direct CPU connection (serial), only the PLC CPU

connected to the GOT can be monitored. When connected to the standby system PLC CPU, the writing of the GOT to a device in the connected PLC CPU is not

reflected. Design a monitor screen that disables writing to the standby system. In the redundant system, the tracking function transfers device data from control system to standby system. When the tracking function is enabled, the device value of the standby system PLC CPU is overwritten by the device value transferred from the control system to the standby system even if the GOT writes to the standby system PLC CPU (Numerical input, Ascii input, Script, Recipe, or others).

As countermeasures to the above, perform the following. Display a monitor screen which indicates that "the connected PLC CPU is the standby system" on a GOT when connecting

the GOT to the standby system PLC CPU. To display the specified monitor screen when connecting the GOT to the standby system PLC CPU, use the special relay

SM1515 (Control status identification flag) of the PLC CPU. (When the SM1515 is OFF, the connected PLC CPU is the standby system) Control the operation of each object by the SM1515, which is set for the operation condition. For the screen switching device, use a GOT internal device. If a device of the PLC CPU is used, the trigger action operation of the GOT may be disabled since the device data of the PLC CPU will is overwritten by the device value transferred with the redundant system tracking function.

1) Numerically input D100=100 from the GOT.

1) D100=100

2) D100=5

2) Tracks D100=5 from control system to standby system.

Pow er supply

m odule

Pow er supply

m odule

Pow er supply

m odule

MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

Direct CPU connection (serial) Direct CPU connection (serial)

GOT1

Control system (System A)

Em pty

Em pty

Em pty

Em pty

Q 25PR

H C

PU

Q J71LP21-25

Q J71BR

11

Q J71E71-100

Q J61BT11N

Standby system (System B)

Q J72LP25-25

Q J71C

24N

Q 25PR

H C

PU

Q J71LP21-25

Q J71BR

11

Q J71E71-100

Q J61BT11N

GOT2

4 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.2 MELSEC Q Series

3

The following diagram shows an example of screen setting using SM1515. System configuration example: when using one GOT

Create a monitor screen on the base screen 1 that performs the following operations for when connecting a GOT to control system and standby system. 1) When connecting to the control system, the monitor screen displays a message calling a touch switch operation, by which the screen switches to the next screen. 2) When connecting to the standby system, the monitor screen displays a message calling the reconnection of the connection cable.

1. Set the screen switching device of the base screen. Choose [Common] [GOT Environmental Setting] [Screen Switching/Window], and set the internal device GD100 as the base screen switching device. (Do not use PLC CPU devices for the screen switching device. If used, the Trigger Action operation of the GOT may be disabled since the device data of the PLC CPU is overwritten by the device value transferred with the redundant system tracking function)

1) When connecting to the control system 2) When connecting to the standby system

GOT

Control system (System A)

Q25PRH CPU

QJ71 BR11

Standby system (System B)

Station No. 0

Q25PRH CPU

QJ71 BR11

Station No. 1

QJ72 BR15

Station No. 2

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.2 MELSEC Q Series 185

18

2. Set the trigger action. Make the setting so that the base screen 1 is displayed when the connected PLC CPU is the standby system (SM1515 is OFF) in the project specified by selecting [Common] [Trigger Action].

Create the trigger action in the project on the Project tab.

3. Set the comment display on the base screen 1. Set a comment to be displayed on the base screen 1 depending on the system status (ON/OFF of the SM1515) of the connected PLC CPU using the Comment Display (Bit). Select [Object] [Comment Display] [Bit Comment] and set Comment Display (Bit).

1) Device/Style tab screen 2) Comment tab screen (ON status) 3) Comment tab screen (OFF status)

Condition 1 : SM1515 (while OFF) When the SM1515 is OFF, the connected PLC CPU is the standby system.

Operation : GD100=1 The screen switches to the base screen 1.

Device/Style tab 5151MS :eciveD

enoN :epahS Comment tab : Basic Comment Comment Display Type Text (ON) : The operation status is control system.

Touch the screen to display the next screen. Comment Display Type Text (OFF) : The operation status is standby system.

Reconnect the PLC connection cable to the control system CPU.

6 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.2 MELSEC Q Series

3

4. Set the touch switches on the base screen 1. By using the go to screen switch function, set a touch switch for shifting the screen to the next screen with a screen touch, when the connected PLC CPU is the control system (SM1515 is ON). Select [Object] [Switch] [Go To Screen Switch] and set the screen switching function. Set the same size for the touch switch as the base screen size so that touching any place of the screen enables the switch operation.

1) Next Screen tab 2) Style tab screen 3) Trigger tab screen

The following shows the created base screen 1.

Next Screen tab Screen Type : Base Go To Screen : Fixed 2 Style tab Display Style : None (Shape) Trigger tab Trigger Type : ON Trigger Device : SM1515

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.2 MELSEC Q Series 187

18

CC-Link connection (Intelligent device station) This section describes the CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) that connects the GOT set as the intelligent device station to the CC-Link network. The following shows an example of connecting the GOT set as the intelligent device station to the CC-Link network.

Connection method Connect the CC-Link network system to the GOT. For details, refer to the following. Page 689 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION)

GT Designer3 setting Set GT Designer3 as follows.

In this case, the GOT monitoring is performed by transient transmission of the CC-Link network system. Therefore, a longer time-lag occurs for displaying objects compared with directly monitoring the PLC CPU. For displaying objects with a shorter time-lag, set the device for RX, RY, RWw, RWr of the host station set in the CC-Link network and execute the cyclic transmission. For details, refer to the following. Page 107 CC-Link System Access Range for Monitoring

Setting item Settings Model Controller Type MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700

Device setting (Network setting) Other NW No.: 0 (fixed)

Station No.: 0 (Master station)

MELSEC Redundant Setting Do not set the item.

Monitor target

MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

CC-Link connection

P ow

er supply

m odule

GOT

Network No. 0, Station No. 0 (Master station)

Control system

(System A)

E m

pty

Q 25P

R H

C P

U

Q J71LP

21-25

Q J71B

R 11

Q J71E

71-100

Q J61B

T11N

Network No. 0, Station No. 2 (Intelligent device station)

Em pty

Standby system (System B)

Q 25P

R H

C P

U

Q J71LP

21-25

Q J71B

R 11

Q J71E

71-100

Q J61B

T11N

Q J72LP

25-25

Q J71C

24N

CC-Link

Network No. 0, Station No. 1 (Standby master station)

P ow

er supply

m odule

P ow

er supply

m odule

E m

pty

Em pty